JP2022086535A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine enabling prevention of an attachment error of a front door to a certain game board.SOLUTION: A game machine is provided, the game machine including boards (a driver board 162 for upper frame lamps and a driver board 163 for lower frame lamps) mounted with ports for input and output (an input-output port 162a for upper frame lamps and an input-output port 163a for lower frame lamps) having a plurality of threads of terminals. Addresses regarding the input-output ports are set by plural terminals (4 threads) that are some of the plurality of threads of terminals. The addresses include specific unique information (manufacturer identification information and model identification information) representing predetermined attributes.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 57

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, a pachinko gaming machine includes a gaming board and a front door that is openable and closable to the gaming board (see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No.

In recent years, in general, the gaming board and the front door constituting one pachinko gaming machine are designed and manufactured by the same manufacturer, but the gaming board and the front door may be designed and manufactured by different manufacturers. Conceivable. As a result, for example, in a game store, a front door of a different model may be attached to a certain game board. Further, even if the game board and the front door are designed and manufactured by the same manufacturer, for example, in a factory or the like, there is a possibility that a front door of a different model may be attached to a certain game board.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing an error in attaching a front door to a certain gaming board.

The gaming machine according to the present invention
A gaming machine equipped with a board equipped with input / output ports having multiple terminals.
The address related to the input / output port is set by some of the plurality of terminals among the plurality of terminals.
The address is characterized in that it contains specific unique information representing a predetermined attribute.

According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent a mistake in attaching the front door to a certain game board.

It is a perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the basic embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of a game board unit. (A) is a front view explaining the standby state of the board movable body, (B) is a front view explaining the moving state of the board movable body, and (C) is a front view explaining the rotating state of the board movable body. It is a front view of the display. It is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the basic embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a game control board side. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the staging control board side. (A) is a table showing the general map-related determination information, and (B) is a table showing the special map-related determination information. (A) is a configuration example of the hit determination table, (B) is a configuration example of the normal map fluctuation pattern determination table, and (C) is a configuration example of the auxiliary game control table. (A) is a configuration example of the jackpot determination table, (B) is a configuration example of the jackpot symbol type determination table, and (C) is a configuration example of the reach determination table. Special figure 1 is a configuration example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. Special figure 2 is a configuration example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. This is a configuration example of the first look-ahead determination table. This is a configuration example of the second look-ahead determination table. (A) is a configuration example of the jackpot game control table, and (B) is a configuration example of the game state setting table. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a demo movie, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a setting screen. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a first normal background image, (B) is a diagram showing an example of a second normal background image, and (C) shows an example of a third normal background image. It is a figure, (D) is a figure which shows an example of the background image for probabilistic variation, (E) is a figure which shows an example of the background image for time saving. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot opening effect, (B) is a diagram showing an example of a round effect, and (C) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot ending effect. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect symbol, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of an effect symbol display area. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation effect of the loss without reach. It is a figure which shows an example from the start of a special figure variation effect to the reach. It is a figure which shows an example of N reach. It is a figure which shows an example of L reach. It is a figure which shows an example of L reach, and is the continuation of FIG. 23. It is a figure which shows an example of SP reach. It is a figure which shows an example of SP reach, and is the continuation of FIG. 25. It is a figure which shows an example of SP reach, and is the continuation of FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a movable body production. It is a figure which shows an example of an operation effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a hold production. It is a figure which shows an example of the hold icon change notice. It is a figure which shows an example of the hold icon change notice. It is a flowchart of a game control main process. It is a flowchart of the game control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of a sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of the sensor detection process, and is the figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 35. It is a flowchart of a normal operation process. It is a flowchart of a special operation process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a variation pattern determination process. It is a flowchart of special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of the staging control main process. It is a flowchart of 1ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 10ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis processing, and is the figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 46. It is a front view schematically showing the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the electric structure mainly on the game control board side, and the frame control board side which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the frame control main process which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the power-on processing in the frame control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the frame control side timer interrupt processing which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the possession number restoration processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a firing control process. It is a time chart which shows an example of the launch control of a game ball when the launch handle is continuously operated. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the ball holding number management process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of fraud detection processing which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a firing prohibition process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game ball entry prevention processing. (A) is a diagram showing a front view of the game board according to the first embodiment, and (B) is a diagram showing a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 60 (A) when the approach blocking device is in the standby state. Yes, (C) is a diagram showing a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 60 (A) when the approach blocking device is in the operating state. It is a block diagram which showed the electric structure of the staging board side which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the staging control main process in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the operation confirmation processing. It is a block diagram which mainly showed the electric structure of the game control board side and the frame control board side which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the frame control side timer interrupt processing which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of fraud detection processing which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the difference ball number management process.

<Basic embodiment>
First, a basic embodiment of the present invention, which is a premise of the characteristic portion of the gaming machine of the present invention, will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. In each of the referenced figures, the same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and duplicate explanations regarding the same parts will be omitted in principle. In the following, for the sake of simplicity of description, by describing a symbol or a code that refers to an information, a signal, a physical quantity, a member, etc., the name of the information, a signal, a physical quantity, a member, etc. for the symbol or the code is omitted or abbreviated. Sometimes.

1. 1. Mechanical Configuration of Gaming Machine A pachinko gaming machine PY, which is a basic embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention, will be described. First, the mechanical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 4. In the following description, the left-right / up-down direction of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PY is the left-right / up-down direction (front view) for the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY. Further, "front" is the direction from the pachinko gaming machine PY to approach the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY, and "rear" is the direction from the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY to approach the pachinko gaming machine PY. ,explain.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine PY includes a gaming board unit YU including the gaming board 1 and a gaming machine frame 2 in which the gaming board unit YU is housed. The gaming machine frame 2 has a frame-shaped outer frame 21 fixed to the game store, an inner frame 22 attached to the outer frame 21 to which the gaming board unit YU is attached, and before being rotatably supported by the inner frame 22. It is provided with a door 23.

The outer frame 21, the inner frame 22, and the front door 23 have substantially the same outer shape in front view. The inner frame 22 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 21.

The front door 23 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 22. The front door 23 includes a frame-shaped front frame 23 m in which a large opening having a substantially vertically long rectangular shape is formed in the center thereof, and a transparent plate 23t fitted in the opening. When the front door 23 is closed, the game board 1 included in the game board unit YU and the transparent plate 23t face each other. The transparent plate 23t is a transparent synthetic resin plate and is formed into a substantially vertically long rectangular shape. Therefore, when the pachinko gaming machine PY is installed in the game store, the player in front of the pachinko gaming machine PY can visually recognize the gaming area 6 formed on the front surface of the gaming board 1 through the transparent plate 23t. can. As the transparent plate 23t, a transparent glass plate may be used instead of the transparent synthetic resin plate. It suffices if the gaming area 6 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko gaming machine PY through the transparent plate 23t.

At the lower right of the front surface of the front frame 23 m, a launch handle 72k that can be rotated to launch a game ball is provided. The amount (rotation angle) at which the firing handle 72k is operated is associated with the magnitude of the force (launching intensity) applied to the gaming ball to launch the gaming ball. Therefore, the game ball is launched with a firing intensity corresponding to the rotation operation of the firing handle 72k.

Further, at the lower part of the front surface of the front frame 23 m, an upper plate 34 that protrudes greatly forward and a lower plate 35 arranged directly under the upper plate 34 are provided. At the center of the front side of the upper plate 34, a first effect button 40k that can be pressed downward is provided. The operation portion visibly protruding from the upper surface of the upper plate 34 of the first effect button 40k is formed into a hemispherical shape. Further, on the rear side of the upper surface of the upper plate 34, a supply ball storage hole 34A for storing the game ball supplied to the launch handle 72k is formed. Further, on the upper surface of the lower plate 35, a surplus ball storage hole 35A for storing a surplus game ball that cannot be accommodated in the supply ball storage hole 34A is provided.

Further, on the upper side, the right side, and the left side of the transparent plate 23t on the front surface of the front frame 23 m, the upper side decorative body 31, the right side decorative body 32, and the left side decorative body 33 are provided. On the bottom surface of the upper decorative body 31, a pair of two speakers 52 capable of outputting sound, specifically, a speaker 52L arranged on the left side and a speaker 52R arranged on the right side are predetermined in the left-right direction facing downward. They are arranged side by side at a distance. Further, at the lower part of the right decorative body 32, a second effect button 41k that can be pressed downward is provided. The operation portion of the second effect button 41k is formed in a rod shape. Further, a frame lamp 53 capable of emitting light is provided from the right decorative body 32 to the front right portion of the upper plate 34 and from the left decorative body 33 to the front left portion of the upper plate 34.

The positions and numbers of the members and devices provided in the gaming machine frame 2 can be appropriately changed as long as they do not interfere with the gaming.

Next, the game board unit YU will be described with reference to FIG. 2 in addition to FIG. The game board unit YU has a game board 1 and a board production unit EU attached to the back surface of the game board 1. First, the game board 1 will be described. The game board 1 is made of a transparent synthetic resin plate. A substantially circular opening 1A is formed in the substantially center of the game board 1.

On the front surface of the game board 1, a substantially ring-shaped center decorative body 61 is formed so as to project forward along the opening 1A. Further, on the outside of the center decorative body 61, an outer rail 62 formed in a substantially ring shape so as to largely surround the center decorative body 61, and an outer rail between the left side portion of the outer rail 62 and the center decorative body 61. A curved inner rail 63, which is substantially parallel to the center decoration 61, is formed.

Then, on the front surface of the game board 1, the area surrounded by the center decorative body 61, the outer rail 62, the inner rail 63, and the like forms the game area 6. That is, the front surface of the game board 1 is divided into a game area 6 and other areas by the center decorative body 61, the outer rail 62, and the inner rail 63. Further, the area surrounded by the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 63 forms a launch area 7 through which the launched game ball can pass toward the game area 6.

The game area 6 is an area in which a game ball launched by operating the launch handle 72k can flow down, and is provided for playing a game with the pachinko gaming machine PY. A large number of gaming nails (not shown) are projected in the gaming area 6. The game nail appropriately connects the game ball that enters the game area 6 and flows down the game area 6 to the general winning opening 10, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, the gate 13, the large winning opening 14, and the like. It constitutes a route to guide to.

A general winning device 10D is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 6. In the general winning device 10D, the general winning opening 10 is formed so that a game ball can be entered. When the game balls enter the general winning opening 10, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. The game ball that has entered the general winning opening 10 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

Further, a first start winning device 11D is provided immediately below the center of the center decorative body 61 in the game area 6. In the first start winning device 11D, the first start opening 11 is formed so that a game ball can enter. The first start winning device 11D has a non-operating structure that does not operate. Therefore, the first starting port 11 is constant (unchanged) without changing the ease of entering the game ball. When the game balls enter the first starting port 11, a predetermined number (for example, 4) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. The game ball that has entered the first starting port 11 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

From the left side portion to the lower end portion of the center decorative body 61, a warp portion 61w through which the game ball is passed is formed. The entrance to the warp portion 61w is formed on the left side portion of the center decoration body 61. The game ball that has entered the warp portion 61w passes through the inside of the warp portion 61w and exits from the exit. A stage 61s on which the game ball can roll is provided on the upper surface of the lower end portion of the center decorative body 61 near the exit of the warp portion 61w. At the tip of the stage 61s, a downward guiding portion 61y that guides the game ball downward is provided. A first starting port 11 is provided directly below the downward guide portion 61y.

A second start winning device (so-called "electric chew") 12D is provided immediately below the first start opening 11 in the game area 6. The electric chew 12D is formed with a second starting port 12 that can be changed into a closed mode in which the game ball cannot enter and an open mode in which the game ball can enter. The second starting port 12 takes a closed mode and an open mode by the electric chew opening / closing member 12k provided in the electric chew 12D. That is, the second starting port 12 is opened and closed by the operation of the electric chew opening / closing member 12k.

The electric chew opening / closing member 12k is composed of a substantially L-shaped member in front view, and normally closes the second starting port 12. The electric chew opening / closing member 12k can project forward from the retracted state where the front end surface is flush with the game area 6. When the electric chew opening / closing member 12k protrudes forward, the electric chew opening / closing member 12k protrudes vertically to the game area 6, and the second starting port 12 opens so that the ball can enter. Specifically, a vertical portion erected at the left end of the horizontal portion of the electric chew opening / closing member 12k receives the game ball and is guided from the horizontal portion to the second starting port 12.

In this way, the game ball can enter the second starting port 12 only when the electric chew opening / closing member 12k is in the open state. When the game balls enter the second starting port 12, a predetermined number (for example, two) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. The game ball that has entered the second starting port 12 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

Further, a gate 13 is provided on the right side of the center decoration body 61. The gate 13 is configured to allow a game ball to pass through. Even if the game ball passes through the gate 13, the prize ball is not paid out. The game ball that has passed through the gate 13 flows down the game area 6 as it is.

A large winning device 14D is provided on the right side of the first starting winning device 11D in the game area 6 and on the downstream side of the gate 13. The large winning device 14D is formed with a large winning opening 14 that can be changed into a closed mode in which a game ball cannot enter and an open mode in which a game ball can enter. The big winning opening 14 takes a closed mode and an open mode by the AT opening / closing member 14k provided in the big winning device 14D. That is, the large winning opening 14 is opened and closed by the operation of the AT opening / closing member 14k.

The AT opening / closing member 14k is a movable member made of a flat plate having a substantially horizontally long rectangular shape in front view, and normally closes the large winning opening 14. A horizontal rotation axis is provided at the lower end of the AT opening / closing member 14k. The AT opening / closing member 14k can rotate about 90 degrees around its axis of rotation so that its upper end tilts forward. When the AT opening / closing member 14k rotates, the AT opening / closing member 14k is in a state of projecting vertically to the game area 6, and the large winning opening 14 is opened so that the ball can be entered.

In this way, it is possible to enter the game ball into the large winning opening 14 only when the AT opening / closing member 14k is in the open state. When the game ball enters the large prize opening 14, a predetermined number (1 in the basic embodiment) of the game balls is paid out as a prize ball. The game ball that has entered the large winning opening 14 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

Further, below the large winning device 14D in the game area 6, the upper surface thereof is formed diagonally downward to the left, and the guidance path 64 for guiding the game ball to the second starting port 12 is the game area 6 (front surface of the game board 1). It is provided so as to project forward from. The game ball rolling on the upper surface of the guidance path 64 can flow down toward the second starting port 12, but basically cannot enter the first starting port 11.

It should be noted that the first starting port 11, the second starting port 12, the large winning opening 14, and the general winning opening 10 collectively enter the game ball and pass through the gate 13 of the game ball. Collectively referred to as "winning" to the second starting opening 12, the large winning opening 14, the general winning opening 10, and the gate 13.

By the way, the game area 6 on which the game ball can flow down can be divided into a left game area 6A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right game area 6B on the right side. The operation mode of the launch handle 72k that launches the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 6A is called "left-handed". On the other hand, the operation mode of the launch handle 72k that launches the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 6B is called "right-handed".

In the game area 6, the flow path through which the game ball can flow down when the game ball is launched by hitting left is called the first flow path R1, and the game ball can flow down when the game ball is launched by hitting right. The flow path is referred to as a second flow path R2. The first flow path R1 and the second flow path R2 are also composed of a large number of gaming nails (not shown).

A first starting port 11 and two general winning openings 10 are provided on the first flow path R1. Therefore, the player can aim to win a prize in the first starting opening 11 or the general winning opening 10 by firing the game ball so as to flow down the first flow path R1 by hitting left. On the other hand, a second starting port 12, a gate 13, and a large winning opening 14 are provided on the second flow path R2. Therefore, the player can aim to win a prize in the gate 13, the second starting opening 12, or the large winning opening 14 by launching the game ball so as to flow down the second flow path R2 by hitting right.

It should be noted that, at the substantially lowermost portion of the game area 6, two out ports 19 are provided to discharge the game balls that have been driven into the game area 6 but have not won any of the winning openings to the outside of the game area 6. There is. In addition, the number of prize balls for winning each winning opening can be set as appropriate.

Next, the board production unit EU attached to the back surface of the game board 1 will be described. The board production unit EU is a unitization of a plurality of devices that mainly perform production. An image display device 50 and a board movable device 55 are attached to the board effect unit EU.

The image display device 50 is composed of a 20-inch 3D liquid crystal display, and includes a display unit 50a capable of displaying a 3D image. The image display device 50 is arranged several centimeters behind the game board 1.

The board movable device 55 includes a movable board movable body 55k. The board movable body 55k has a horizontally long plate-shaped elevating member 55k2 that is maintained in a horizontal state, and a substantially elliptical rotating member 55k1 provided at the center of the elevating member 55k2 in the left-right direction. The board movable body 55k is arranged between the game board 1 and the image display device 50. In the standby state of the board movable body 55k, the lower end portion of the board movable body 55k, specifically, the lower end portion of the rotating member 55k1 is slightly downward from the upper end of the opening 1A of the game board 1. positioned. That is, the board movable body 55k is arranged so that only a part of the lower end portion of the rotating member 55k1 can be seen by the player and most of it cannot be seen in the standby state (see FIG. 3A).

Then, the board movable body 55k can descend from the initial position to a predetermined operating position as a whole, rise from the operating position, and return to the initial position (see FIG. 3B). The predetermined operating position is a position where the movable board 55k is located substantially in the center of the opening 1A when viewed from the front. Here, a predetermined work position can be appropriately set, regardless of whether the board movable body 55k is placed above or below the substantially center of the opening 1A in front view. good.

Further, the rotating member 55k1 can rotate clockwise and counterclockwise in the front view around the rotation axis formed in the front-rear direction at the center thereof (see FIG. 3C). The rotational movement of the rotating member 55k1 can be executed when the board movable body 55k moves from the standby position to the operating position, is held at the operating position, and moves from the operating position to the standby position.

The positions and numbers of the members and devices provided in the game board unit YU can be appropriately changed as long as they do not interfere with the game.

Next, the indicators 8 arranged on the right side (the portion other than the game area 6) substantially at the center in the vertical direction of the game area 6 formed on the front surface of the game board 1 will be described. As shown in FIG. 4, the display device 8 includes a special figure 1 display 81a for variably displaying the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “special figure 1”) and a second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “special figure 2”). A special figure 2 display 81b for variably displaying) and a normal figure display 82 for variably displaying a normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as “normal figure”) are included. Further, the indicators 8 include a special figure 1 hold indicator 83a for displaying the special figure 1 hold number described later and a special figure 2 hold indicator 83b for displaying the special figure 2 hold number described later. ..

The variable display of the special figure 1 is executed when the special figure 1 lottery triggered by the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 11 is performed. Further, the variable display of the special figure 2 is executed when the special figure 2 lottery triggered by the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 12 is performed. The special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery will be described later. In the following description, special figure 1 and special figure 2 are collectively referred to as "special figure", and special figure 1 lottery and special figure 2 lottery are collectively referred to as "special figure lottery". Further, the special figure 1 display 81a and the special figure 2 display 81b are collectively referred to as "special figure display 81". Further, the special figure 1 hold indicator 83a and the special figure 2 hold indicator 83b are collectively referred to as "special figure hold indicator 83".

The variable display of the special figure informs the result of the special figure lottery. In the variable display of the special figure, the special figure is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped. The stop-displayed special figure (stop special figure) is identification information representing the result of the special figure lottery derived as the display result of the variable display. If the stop-displayed special figure is a predetermined special figure, a big hit game is performed with the opening of the big winning opening 14.

The special figure 1 display 81a and the special figure 2 display 81b are each composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side. The lighting mode of the special figure 1 display 81a and the special figure 2 display 81b represents a special figure corresponding to the result of the special figure lottery, that is, the result of the special figure lottery. For example, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a big hit, the final result is "□□ ■■ □□ ■■" (□: lit, ■: off), which is the first, second, fifth, and sixth from the left. A certain LED lights up. This lighting mode is a jackpot symbol and represents a jackpot. If the result of the special drawing lottery is lost, only the LED on the far right, such as "■■■■■■■ □", will finally light up. This lighting mode is a loss symbol and represents a loss. The lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the special drawing lottery is not limited and can be set as appropriate. Therefore, for example, all the LEDs may be turned off as a lost pattern.

Further, in the variable display of the special map, the variable display of the special map is performed over a predetermined fluctuation time before the special map is stopped and displayed. The mode of the variable display of the special figure is, for example, a mode in which each LED is turned on so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of the variable display is not particularly limited, and if each LED is not stopped and displayed (lighting display in a specific mode), all the LEDs may be appropriately set such as blinking all at once.

By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine PY, the special drawing lottery and the variable display of the special drawing may not be performed immediately even if the gaming ball wins a prize in the first starting opening 11 or the second starting opening 12. Specifically, it is a case where a prize is given to the first starting opening 11 or the second starting opening 12 of the game ball during the execution of the variable display of the special figure or the execution of the jackpot game. In this case, the special drawing lottery and the variable display of the special drawing are suspended based on the winning. This reserved special drawing lottery and variable display of special drawings are called "special drawing reservations".

The special drawing hold includes the special drawing 1 lottery held based on the winning of the first starting port 11, the "special drawing 1 holding" representing the variable display of the special drawing 1, and the winning of the second starting opening 12. There are a special figure 2 lottery held based on the above, and a "special figure 2 hold" representing the variable display of the special figure 2. Then, the special figure 1 hold display 83a displays the number of the special figure 1 hold, that is, the number of the special figure 1 lottery and the variable display of the special figure 1. On the other hand, the special figure 2 hold indicator 83b displays the number of the special figure 2 hold, that is, the number of the special figure 2 lottery held and the variable display of the special figure 2.

It is possible to set or not set the upper limit of the number of special figure 1 hold and the number of special figure 2 hold. Further, when an upper limit is set for the number of special figure 1 hold and the number of special figure 2 hold, the number of special figure 1 hold and the number of special figure 2 hold may be the same or different. In the basic embodiment, it is assumed that the upper limit of the number of special figure 1 hold and the number of special figure 2 hold is set to "4".

Each of the special figure 1 hold display 83a and the special figure 2 hold display 83b is composed of four LEDs, and by turning on the LEDs for the number of the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold. Figure 1 Displays the number of holds and Special Figure 2 Holds. In the following, the number of special figure 1 hold is referred to as "special figure 1 hold number (U1)", and the number of special figure 2 hold is referred to as "special figure 2 hold number (U2)". In addition, "special figure 1 hold number" and "special figure 2 hold number" are collectively referred to as "special figure hold number". Further, the "special figure 1 hold indicator 83a" and the "special figure 2 hold indicator 83b" are collectively referred to as "special figure hold indicator 83".

Further, the variable display of the normal map is executed when the general map lottery triggered by the winning of the game ball to the gate 13 is performed. Then, the variable display of the normal map informs the result of the normal map lottery. In the variable display of the normal map, the normal map is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped. The stopped-displayed normal map (stop-displayed normal map) is identification information representing the result of the normal map lottery derived as the display result of the variable display. When the stop-displayed normal map is a predetermined specific normal map, an auxiliary game is performed with the opening of the second starting port 12.

The normal figure display 82 is composed of, for example, two LEDs. The lighting mode of the normal figure display 82 represents a normal figure according to the result of the normal figure lottery, that is, the result of the normal figure lottery. If the result of the regular drawing lottery is a hit, both LEDs will eventually turn on, such as "□□" (□: on, ■: off). This lighting mode is a hit symbol and represents a hit. If the result of the regular drawing lottery is lost, only the LED on the right will light up, such as "■ □". This lighting mode is a loss symbol and represents a loss. The lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the general drawing lottery is not limited and can be set as appropriate. For example, a mode in which all the LEDs are turned off may be adopted as a lost symbol.

Further, before the normal map is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the normal map is performed for a predetermined fluctuation time. In the basic embodiment, the variation display of the normal diagram is an embodiment in which both LEDs are turned on alternately. It should be noted that the mode of variable display in the normal drawing is not particularly limited, and if each LED is not stopped display (lighting display in a specific mode), all LEDs may be appropriately set such as blinking all at once. ..

2. 2. Electrical configuration of the gaming machine Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7. As shown in FIG. 5, on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine PY, the game control board 100 that controls the game (progress of the game) capable of obtaining the game profit, and the game control board 100 responds to the control of the game. Power is supplied to the effect control board 120 that controls the effect, the image control board 140 that controls the image, the payout control board 170 that controls the payout of the game ball, and the boards 100, 120, 140, 170. The power supply board 190 is attached.

A power switch 191 is connected to the power supply board 190. The power is turned on / off by turning the power switch 191 on and off.

As shown in FIG. 6, a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as “game control microcomputer”) 101 that controls the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine PY according to a program is mounted on the game control board 100. Therefore, the game control board 100 can be positioned as a game control unit that controls the game. In addition, the game that can acquire the game profit to be controlled by the game control board 100 includes a special figure lottery, a variable display of the special figure, a big hit game, a game state setting described later, a normal figure lottery, and a variable display of the normal figure. , Auxiliary games, etc. are included.

The game control microcomputer 101 includes a game ROM (Read Only Memory) 103 that stores programs and tables for controlling the progress of the game, a game RAM (Random Access Memory) 104 that is used as a work memory, and a game. A gaming CPU (Central Processing Unit) 102 that executes a program stored in the ROM 103 is included.

The game ROM 103 stores a program for performing a game control main process, a game control side timer interrupt process, and the like, which will be described later. Further, the game ROM 103 includes a jackpot determination table, a jackpot symbol type determination table, a reach determination table, a special figure variation pattern determination table, a look-ahead determination table, a jackpot game control table, a game state setting table, a hit determination table, and an auxiliary. A game control table and the like are stored. The gaming ROM 103 may be externally attached.

Further, the gaming RAM 104 is provided with a special figure holding storage unit 105. Here, the special figure reservation storage unit 105 will be described. As described above, if there is a prize in the first start opening 11 or the second start opening 12 of the game ball, the special figure hold can occur, but if the special figure hold is possible, that is, the number of special figure hold is When the upper limit has not been reached, determination information consisting of various random numbers for performing a special drawing lottery or the like is acquired based on this winning. Then, this determination information is temporarily stored in the special figure hold storage unit 105 as the special figure hold. In the following, the determination information acquired by winning a prize in the first starting port 11 of the game ball is referred to as "special figure 1 related determination information", and is acquired by winning a prize in the second starting port 12 of the game ball. Judgment information is referred to as "special figure 2 related judgment information". Further, the special figure 1 related judgment information and the special figure 2 related judgment information are collectively referred to as "special figure related judgment information".

Then, the special figure 1 related determination information is stored in the special figure 1 hold storage unit 105a in the special figure hold storage unit 105 as the special figure 1 hold. On the other hand, the special figure 2 related determination information is stored in the special figure 2 hold storage unit 105b in the special figure hold storage unit 105 as the special figure 2 hold. The number of special figure 1 related determination information that can be stored in the special figure 1 hold storage unit 105a, that is, the upper limit of the special figure 1 hold number is set to "4". Further, the number of special figure 2 related determination information that can be stored in the special figure 2 hold storage unit 105b, that is, the upper limit of the special figure 2 hold number is set to "4".

Further, various sensors and solenoids are connected to the game control board 100 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Therefore, signals output by various sensors are input to the game control board 100. Further, the game control board 100 outputs signals to various actuators.

Various sensors connected to the game control board 100 include a general winning opening sensor 10a, a first starting opening sensor 11a, a second starting opening sensor 12a, a gate sensor 13a, and a large winning opening sensor 14a. ..

The general winning opening sensor 10a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the general winning opening 10. The first starting port sensor 11a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first starting port 11. The second starting port sensor 12a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second starting port 12. The gate sensor 13a detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 13. The large winning opening sensor 14a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the large winning opening 14.

Further, various actuators connected to the game control board 100 include an electric chew solenoid 12s and an AT solenoid 14s. The electric chew solenoid 12s drives the electric chew opening / closing member 12k of the electric chew 12D. The AT solenoid 14s drives the AT opening / closing member 14k of the prize-winning device 14D.

The type and number of sensors connected to the game control board 100 can be appropriately changed as long as the game is not hindered. Further, the type and number of actuators connected to the game control board 100 can be appropriately changed as long as the game is not hindered.

Further, the game control board 100 is connected to indicators 8 (special figure display 81, normal figure display 82, and special figure hold display 83). The display control of these indicators 8 is performed by the game control microcomputer 101.

Further, the game control board 100 transmits various commands to the payout control board 170, and also receives signals from the payout control board 170 for payout monitoring. A card unit CU and a payout device 73 are connected to the payout control board 170, and a launcher 72 is also connected to the payout control board 170. Further, the card unit CU is a device that is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine PY and enables ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card.

The payout control board 170 drives the payout motor 73m of the payout device 73 to pay out prize balls and rental balls based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 101 and the signal from the connected card unit CU. The prize balls and rental balls to be paid out are detected by the payout sensor 73a for counting.

Further, the launching device 72 is a device for launching a game ball. The launching handle 72k constitutes an operation unit or an input unit that receives an operation for launching a game ball to the launching device 72, and is included in the launching device 72. The firing handle 72k is provided with a touch switch 72a capable of detecting contact of a person such as a player with the firing handle 72k. When the player operates the firing handle 72k, the touch switch 72a detects the contact of the player with the firing handle 72k and outputs a detection signal to the payout control board 170 via the firing control circuit 175.

Further, a launch volume knob 72b capable of detecting the rotation angle (operation amount) of the launch handle 72k is connected to the launch handle 72k. The launching device 72 drives the launching motor 72m so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the launching handle 72k detected by the launching volume knob 72b. In the pachinko gaming machine PY, one gaming ball is launched about every 0.6 seconds while the rotation operation to the launching handle 72k is maintained.

Further, the game control board 100 transmits various commands including information about the game to the effect control board 120 according to the progress of the game. The staging control board 120 can grasp the progress of the game (game control content) by the game control board 100 based on various commands sent from the game control board 100.

The connection between the game control board 100 and the effect control board 120 is a unidirectional communication connection capable of only transmitting a signal from the game control board 100 to the effect control board 120. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means is interposed between the game control board 100 and the staging control board 120.

As shown in FIG. 7, the staging control board 120 is mounted with a staging control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as “staging control microcomputer”) 121 that controls the staging of the pachinko gaming machine PY according to a program. The staging control board 120 can be positioned as an staging control unit that controls the staging together with the image control board 140, the voice control circuit 161 and the sub drive board 162, which will be described later. However, the staging control unit includes at least the staging control board 120, and uses the staging device (image display device 50, speaker 52, frame lamp 53, board movable body 55k, etc.) for game staging, customer waiting staging, and operation promotion. It suffices if the production can be controlled.

The effects to be controlled by the effect control board 120 include game effects (special figure variation effect, hold effect, jackpot game effect, etc.), customer waiting effect, and operation of the first effect button 40k and the second effect button 41k. It includes an operation promotion effect that encourages operation during a valid period (operation valid period).

The staging control microcomputer 121 is stored in a staging ROM 123 that stores a program for controlling the staging as the game progresses by the game control board 100, a staging RAM 124 that is used as a work memory, and a staging ROM 123. The staging CPU 122 that executes the program is included.

The effect ROM 123 stores a program for performing an effect control main process, a receive interrupt process, a 1 ms timer interrupt process, a 10 ms timer interrupt process, and the like, which will be described later. The production ROM 123 may be externally attached.

The effect RAM 124 stores a start winning command holding storage unit 125 for storing a start winning command described later, a symbol designation command storage unit 126 for storing a symbol designation command described later, and a special figure for storing a special figure change start command described later. A fluctuation start command storage unit 127 is provided.

Further, the image control board 140 is connected to the staging control board 120. The effect control microcomputer 121 of the effect control board 120 controls the display of the image display device 50 on the image control board 140 based on the command received from the game control board 100, that is, according to the progress of the game by the game control board 100. To do. The connection between the effect control board 120 and the image control board 140 can be both transmission of a signal from the effect control board 120 to the image control board 140 and transmission of a signal from the image control board 140 to the effect control board 120. It is a two-way communication connection.

The image control board 140 includes an image ROM 142 that stores a program for image control and the like, an image RAM 143 that is used as a work memory, and an image CPU 141 that executes a program stored in the image ROM 142. .. Further, the image control board 140 is a CGROM (Character Generator Read Only Memory) 145 that stores image data displayed on the image display device 50, and a VRAM (Video) used for developing image data stored in the CGROM 145. It is equipped with a Random Access Memory) 146 and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 144. All or part of these electronic components may be composed of one chip.

In the CGROM 145, for example, image data for displaying an image displayed on the image display device 50 (still image data, moving image data, specifically, a character, an item, a pattern, a figure, a character, a number, a symbol, etc.) (effect). Image data such as (including patterns) and background images) are stored.

The VDP 144 reads image data from the CGROM 145 and expands it in the expansion area in the VRAM 146 according to the display list created by the image CPU 141 based on the command from the effect control microcomputer 121. Then, the expanded image data is appropriately combined and the image is drawn in the frame buffer in the VRAM 146. Then, the image drawn in the frame buffer is output to the image display device 50 as an RGB signal. As a result, various staging images are displayed on the display unit 50a.

The display list is composed of a group of commands for instructing the execution of drawing on a frame-by-frame basis. The display list contains information on various parameters such as the type of image to be drawn, the position where the image is drawn, the display priority, the display magnification, and the transmittance of the image.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 uses the voice, music, and music from the speaker 52 via the voice control circuit 161 based on the command received from the game control board 100, that is, according to the progress of the game by the game control board 100. Output sound effects, etc.

Audio data such as audio output from the speaker 52 is stored in the effect ROM 123 of the effect control board 120. The voice control circuit 161 may be configured on a board to mount a CPU. In this case, the CPU may be made to execute voice control. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the board and audio data may be stored in the ROM. Further, the speaker 52 may be connected to the image control board 140, and the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 may execute voice control. Further, in this case, the audio data may be stored in the image ROM 142 of the image control board 140.

Further, various sensors serving as an input unit and various actuators serving as a drive source are connected to the staging control board 120 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Signals output from various sensors are input to the staging control board 120. Further, the staging control board 120 outputs signals to various actuators.

The various switches connected to the effect control board 120 include a first effect button sensor 40a and a second effect button sensor 41a. The first effect button sensor 40a detects that the first effect button 40k has been pressed. The second effect button sensor 41a detects that the second effect button 41k has been pressed. When the first effect button sensor 40a and the second effect button sensor 41a detect that they have been operated, they output a signal corresponding to the detected content to the effect control board 120.

The type and number of switches connected to the staging control board 120 can be appropriately changed as long as they do not interfere with the game. Further, the type and number of actuators connected to the staging control board 120 can be appropriately changed as long as they do not interfere with the game.

The various actuators connected to the staging control board 120 include a motor for rotating members 55m1 and a motor for elevating members 55m2. The rotary member motor 55m1 can drive the rotary member 55k1 to rotate the rotary member 55k1. The elevating member motor 55m2 can raise or lower the elevating member 55k2. Specifically, the staging control microcomputer 121 creates operation pattern data that determines the operation mode of the rotating member 55k1 and the elevating member 55k2, and controls the operation of the rotating member 55k1 and the elevating member 55k2 via the sub drive board 162. ..

In the following, the operations of the "rotating member 55k1 and the elevating member 55k2" may be collectively referred to as "the operation of the board movable body 55k". Further, rotating the rotating member 55k1 and lowering or raising the elevating member 55k2 are also referred to as "rotating, lowering or raising the board movable body 55k".

Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 controls the lighting of the frame lamp 53 and the like via the sub drive board 162 based on the command received from the game control board 100 and the like. In detail, the staging control microcomputer 121 creates light emission pattern data (data for determining lighting / extinguishing, emission color, etc., also referred to as lamp data) for determining the light emission mode of the frame lamp 53, and the frame lamp 53 is in accordance with the light emission pattern data. Control the light emission. The data stored in the staging ROM 123 of the staging control board 120 is used to create the light emission pattern data.

The sub drive board 162 may be configured by the board to mount the CPU. In this case, the CPU may be made to execute the lighting control of the frame lamp 53 and the like and the operation control of the board movable body 55k. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the board, and data related to the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

3. 3. Main games by the gaming machine Next, the main games played by the pachinko gaming machine PY will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 15.

3-1. Games related to Fuzu First, we will explain the games related to Fuzu. The pachinko gaming machine PY can execute a general drawing lottery when the launched gaming ball passes through the gate 13. When the normal map lottery is performed, the normal map display 82 performs variable display of the normal map (stop display after performing variable display). Here, there are a hit symbol and a lost symbol in the normal map that is stopped and displayed. In addition, the lost symbol of the normal figure is also referred to as "missing normal figure" in order to distinguish it from the lost symbol of the special figure described later.

When the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is executed, and the game related to the passage of the gate 13 ends. On the other hand, when the lost normal map is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is not performed, and the game related to the passage of the gate 13 ends. Further, in the following, the fact that the game ball passes through the gate 13 when the variable display of the normal map or the auxiliary game is not performed is referred to as "the establishment of the normal map variation start condition".

The pachinko gaming machine PY performs a series of games such as variable display of the normal map and auxiliary games based on the fact that the normal map fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the normal map related judgment information is acquired, and the normal map lottery is performed. Can be done. As shown in FIG. 8A, the acquired general map-related determination information includes a normal symbol random number. Ordinary symbol random numbers are random numbers (judgment information) for performing collision detection. A range is appropriately provided for each random number.

3-1-1. Hit determination The hit determination is a determination for determining whether or not to hit (whether or not to execute an auxiliary game) using, for example, a hit determination table as shown in FIG. 9A. The hit determination table can be associated with the gaming state described later. When associated with the game state, the hit determination table includes a hit determination table (non-time reduction hit determination table) used in the non-time reduction state and a hit determination table (time reduction hit determination table) used in the time reduction state.

In each hit determination table, the determination value of the normal symbol random number (ordinary symbol random number determination value) is appropriately distributed to the hit and the loss which are the results of the hit determination. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY collates the acquired ordinary symbol random numbers with the hit determination table, and determines whether the hit or miss is a hit. If the result of the hit determination is a hit, the hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the normal figure. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination is a loss, the lost normal map is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the normal map. The winning probability can be changed as appropriate.

3-1-2. Normal map fluctuation pattern determination / normal map variable display The normal map fluctuation pattern determination is a judgment for determining a normal map fluctuation pattern using, for example, a normal map fluctuation pattern determination table as shown in FIG. 9B. The normal map fluctuation pattern is identification information regarding predetermined items related to the variable display of the normal map such as the normal map fluctuation time.

The normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table can be associated with a gaming state (non-time saving state / time saving state). When associated with the game state (non-time saving state / time saving state), the normal map fluctuation pattern determination table includes the normal map fluctuation pattern determination table (non-time saving normal map fluctuation pattern determination table) and the time saving used in the non-time saving state. There is a normal map fluctuation pattern judgment table (time saving normal map fluctuation pattern judgment table) used in the state.

In each normal map fluctuation pattern determination table, one normal map fluctuation pattern, which is the result of the normal map fluctuation pattern determination, is stored for each normal map to be stopped. That is, the pachinko gaming machine PY can make the fluctuation time of the normal map different between the non-time saving state and the time saving state. For example, in the non-time saving state, the variable display of the normal map when the lost normal map (lost normal map) is stopped and displayed is determined to be the normal map fluctuation pattern in which the normal map fluctuation time is 30 seconds, and the winning symbol is set. The variable display of the normal map when the stop display is performed is determined by the normal map fluctuation pattern in which the normal map fluctuation time is 30 seconds. In addition, in the time-saving state, the variable display of the normal map when the lost normal map is stopped and displayed is determined to be the normal map fluctuation pattern in which the normal map fluctuation time is 5 seconds, and the winning symbol is stopped and displayed. For the variable display of, the normal map fluctuation pattern is determined so that the normal map fluctuation time is 5 seconds. It should be noted that these fluctuation times of the normal map can be changed as appropriate.

Then, the variable display of the normal map variation time associated with the normal map fluctuation pattern determined by the normal map fluctuation pattern determination is performed by the normal map display 82. By performing the hit determination and the normal map fluctuation pattern determination in this way, the normal map display 82 performs variable display of the normal map.

3-1-3. Auxiliary game Auxiliary game is a variable display of a normal map, and is executed when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) as a display result (result of the general map lottery). In the auxiliary game, the electric chew 12D opens

The elements constituting the auxiliary game (auxiliary game component) include various elements such as the number of times the electric chew 12D is opened and the opening time for each opening. The pachinko gaming machine PY controls the auxiliary game by using the auxiliary game control table. Auxiliary game components are stored in the auxiliary game control table. For example, as shown in FIG. 9C, it is possible to associate a gaming state (non-time saving state / time saving state) with the auxiliary game control table. That is, it is possible to associate the auxiliary game component with the game state (non-time saving state / time saving state). The specific contents of each element such as the number of times of opening and the opening time can be changed as appropriate.

The pachinko gaming machine PY can make the opening time of the electric chew 12D different between the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state and the auxiliary game in the time saving state. For example, in the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state, the electric chew 12D is opened only for the first opening time in which it is difficult to make the electric chew 12D win a game ball such as 0.2 seconds. On the other hand, in the auxiliary game in the time saving state, the game ball is won the electric chew 12D for a longer time than the first opening time such as opening twice for 2.5 seconds with an interval (closing) of 1.0 second. The electric chew 12D is opened only for the second opening time, which is easy to make.

In the following, the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state is also referred to as "short open auxiliary game". On the other hand, the auxiliary game in the short time state is also called "long open auxiliary game". Further, the opening time in each auxiliary game is the total time in the auxiliary game, and is opened a plurality of times in one auxiliary game, for example, opening once and then opening again with an interval of closing once. It may be configured as follows.

3-2. Games related to special figures Next, games related to special figures will be described. The pachinko gaming machine PY can execute the special figure 1 lottery when the launched gaming ball wins the first starting port 11. When the special figure 1 lottery is performed, the special figure 1 display 81a performs a variable display of the special figure 1 (a stop display after performing a variable display) to notify the result of the special figure 1 lottery. Here, the special figure 1 that is stopped and displayed includes a jackpot symbol and a lost symbol. That is, the result of the special figure 1 lottery has a big hit and a loss.

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new game state is set, and the game based on the winning is completed. In addition, when the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is not performed, and the game based on the prize is terminated.

Similarly, the pachinko gaming machine PY can execute the special figure 2 lottery when the launched gaming ball wins the second starting port 12. When the special figure 2 lottery is performed, the special figure 2 display 81b performs a variable display of the special figure 2 (a stop display after performing a variable display) to notify the result of the special figure 2 lottery. Here, the special figure 2 that is stopped and displayed includes a jackpot symbol and a lost symbol. That is, the result of the special figure 2 lottery includes a big hit and a loss.

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new game state is set, and the game based on the winning is completed. Further, when the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is not performed, and the game based on the prize is ended.

Further, in the following, winning a game ball in the first starting opening 11 is referred to as "establishment of the first starting condition", and winning a prize in the second starting opening 12 is "establishment of the second starting condition". That is. Further, "establishment of the first starting condition" and "establishment of the second starting condition" are collectively referred to as "establishment of the starting condition". In addition, the lost symbol of the special symbol is also referred to as a "missing special symbol" in order to distinguish it from the above-mentioned lost symbol of the normal diagram.

The pachinko gaming machine PY performs a series of games such as variable display of special figures and a jackpot game based on the fact that the start condition is satisfied, the special figure-related determination information is acquired, and the special figure lottery is performed. Then, in order to perform variable display of the special figure, various judgments are made on the special figure-related determination information. As shown in FIG. 8B, the special symbol-related determination information to be acquired includes a special symbol random number, a jackpot symbol type random number, a reach random number, and a special symbol variation pattern random number.

The special symbol random number is a random number (judgment information) for performing a jackpot determination. The jackpot symbol type random number is a random number (judgment information) for determining the jackpot symbol type. The reach random number is a random number (judgment information) for performing reach determination. The special symbol variation pattern random number is a random number (determination information) for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. A range is appropriately provided for each random number. Next, each determination made using the special figure-related determination information will be described.

3-2-1. Jackpot determination The jackpot determination is to determine whether or not a jackpot (whether or not to execute a jackpot game), in other words, either a jackpot or a loss, using the jackpot determination table. As shown in FIG. 10A, for example, the jackpot determination table can be provided in association with the gaming state described later. Specifically, the jackpot determination table includes a jackpot determination table used in the normal probability state described later (hereinafter referred to as "normal probability jackpot determination table") and a jackpot determination table used in the high probability state described later (hereinafter referred to as "big hit determination table"). , "High probability jackpot judgment table").

In each jackpot determination table associated with the game state, the determination value of the special symbol random number (special symbol random number determination value) is assigned to the jackpot and the loss which are the results of the jackpot determination. The pachinko gaming machine PY collates the acquired special symbol random numbers with the jackpot determination table associated with the gaming state, and determines whether it is a jackpot or a loss. As shown in FIG. 10A, the high-probability jackpot determination table has more special symbol random number determination values determined to be jackpots than the normal probability jackpot determination table.

It is possible to appropriately change the method of allocating the special symbol random number determination value to the jackpot probability and the determination results of various jackpot determinations.

3-2-2. Jackpot symbol type determination In the jackpot symbol type determination, when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, the jackpot symbol type (big hit symbol type) is determined using the jackpot symbol type determination table as shown in FIG. 10 (B). It is to be. It is possible to associate the type of jackpot symbol with the content of the jackpot, in other words, the component of the jackpot (content that is advantageous to the player) composed of the game privilege given to the player.

In the jackpot symbol type determination table, the type of special symbol that is variably displayed (special figure 1 / special figure 2), in other words, the prize is awarded due to the jackpot symbol type determination (causing the jackpot symbol type determination). It is associated with the type of starting port (first starting port 11 / second starting port 12). That is, in the jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type determination table (first jackpot symbol type determination table) used when the variable display of the special figure 1 is performed and the jackpot used when the variable display of the special figure 2 is performed. There is a symbol type determination table (second big hit symbol type determination table).

Multiple types of jackpot symbols can be set. In each jackpot symbol type determination table, the determination value of the jackpot symbol type random number (the jackpot symbol type random number determination value) is assigned to the jackpot symbol type which is the result of the jackpot symbol type determination. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY collates the acquired jackpot symbol type random numbers with the jackpot symbol type determination table to determine the type of jackpot symbol. Then, in the first jackpot symbol type determination table and the second jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type random number determination values are appropriately distributed to various jackpot symbols.

The type of the jackpot symbol of the special figure 1 and the type of the jackpot symbol of the special figure 2 can be appropriately set. For example, as in the jackpot symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 10B, the jackpot symbol of the special figure 1 is used. As a jackpot symbol A, a jackpot symbol B, and a jackpot symbol C, three types of jackpot symbols are provided, and as a jackpot symbol of special figure 2, three types of jackpot symbols D, a jackpot symbol E, and a jackpot symbol F are used. Can be provided. Then, as in the jackpot symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 10B, in the first jackpot symbol type determination table and the second jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type random number determination values are appropriately distributed to various jackpot symbols. ing. The distribution rate for each jackpot symbol type can be changed as appropriate. In addition, the types of jackpot symbols can be increased or decreased as appropriate.

3-2-3. Reach determination In the reach determination, for example, when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss, whether or not to generate reach by the special figure variation effect described later is determined by using the reach determination table as shown in FIG. 10 (C). It is to decide.

The reach determination table can be associated with a gaming state (non-time saving state / time saving state). When associated with the gaming state, for example, the reach determination table includes a reach determination table (non-time reduction reach determination table) used in the non-time reduction state and a reach determination table (time reduction reach) used in the non-time reduction state. Judgment table).

In each reach judgment table, the judgment value of the reach random number (reach random number judgment value) is divided into "with reach (generate reach)" and "without reach (do not generate reach)" which are the results of reach judgment. There is. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY collates the acquired reach random numbers with the reach determination table, and determines whether or not there is reach (whether or not to generate reach).

As shown in FIG. 10C, the number of reach random number determination values determined to be "reachable (generate reach)" may be different between the non-time reduction reach determination table and the time reduction reach determination table. It is possible. In the following, the result of the reach judgment "with reach (generate reach)" performed on the premise that the result of the jackpot judgment is "miss" is referred to as "loss with reach", and "without reach (without reach). "Does not generate reach)" is sometimes referred to as "loss without reach". In addition, "loss without reach" may be referred to as "loss without reach", and "loss with reach" may be referred to as "loss with reach".

3-2-4. Special figure fluctuation pattern judgment In the special figure fluctuation pattern judgment, regardless of whether the result of the jackpot judgment is a big hit or a loss, for example, a fluctuation pattern judgment table of a special symbol as shown in FIGS. 11 to 12 (special figure fluctuation pattern). The determination table) is used to determine the variation pattern (special map variation pattern) of the variable display of the special map.

The special figure fluctuation pattern is identification information for identifying predetermined items related to a special figure fluctuation time, a so-called “scale”, an effect flow (effect content) of a special figure variation effect described later, and the like. In addition to the special map fluctuation time and the effect flow (effect content) of the special map variation effect, the special map variation pattern can also include identification information regarding the result of the jackpot determination and the result of the reach determination. The type and number of special figure fluctuation patterns can be changed as appropriate.

The special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table is the type of special symbol (special figure 1 / special figure 2) that performs variable display to be judged, in other words, the starting port where a prize is given due to the special figure fluctuation pattern judgment. It can be associated with the type (first starting port 11 / second starting port 12). That is, in the special figure variation pattern determination table, the special figure variation pattern determination table (special figure 1 variation pattern determination table: FIG. 11) used when performing the variable display of the special figure 1 and the variable display of the special figure 2 are displayed. There is a special figure variation pattern determination table (special figure 2 variation pattern determination table: FIG. 12) used at the time of the operation.

Then, each special figure variation pattern determination table can be associated with a gaming state (non-time saving state / time saving state). Specifically, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table is used in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table (non-time saving special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table) used in the non-time saving state and in the time saving state. There is a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table (special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table for time saving). On the other hand, similarly, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table is also used in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table (non-time saving special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table) used in the non-time saving state and in the time saving state. There is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table (special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for time saving).

Further, each special figure variation pattern determination table associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state / time saving state) can be further associated with the jackpot determination result and the reach determination result. That is, the non-time saving special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table and the time saving special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table have a jackpot use, a reach loss, and a reachless loss, respectively. Similarly, the non-time saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table and the time saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table also have a jackpot, a reach loss, and a non-reach loss, respectively.

Further, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for each reachless loss associated with the gaming state can also be associated with the special figure 1 hold number. For example, it is used when the special figure 1 holding number (U1) is 0 to 2 and the special drawing 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for loss without reach is used, and when the special drawing 1 holding number (U1) is 3 to 4. There is a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table for loss without reach. Similarly, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for each reachless loss associated with the gaming state can also be associated with the special figure 2 hold number. Specifically, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for loss without reach used when the special figure 2 hold number (U2) is 0 to 2, and the special figure 2 hold number (U2) when the special figure 2 hold number (U2) is 3 to 4. There is a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for loss without reach, which is used in the above.

Then, the special map display 81 performs the variation display of the special map variation time according to the special map variation pattern determined by each special map variation pattern determination. Then, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the display result (result of the special symbol lottery) of the variable display of the special symbol after the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the next special symbol is not immediately performed, and subsequently. , The jackpot game is executed.

Further, it is possible to associate each special figure variation pattern with an effect flow of the special figure variation effect as shown in the third column from the right in the table of FIGS. 11 to 12. Here, a typical effect constituting the effect flow of the special figure variation effect associated with the special figure variation pattern will be described.

There are normal fluctuation, reach, normal reach (N reach), long reach (L reach), special reach (SP reach), and battle production as the effects that make up the effect flow of the special figure variation effect.

The normal fluctuation suggests that the staging symbols that had been stopped and displayed started to fluctuate, and each of the staging symbols constituting each staging symbol was fluctuated at a high speed to the extent that it was difficult to recognize, and the variable display of the special symbol was started. It is a production to do. Then, the special figure fluctuation effect (the part from the start of the change of the effect symbol to the stop of the change) related to the loss change without reach, and the part until the reach is established (determined) in the special figure change effect where the reach occurs are normal fluctuations. May consist of.

Immediately after the reach is established (determined) through normal fluctuations, the N reach is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) at the position where the effect symbols constituting the reach are temporarily stopped, and the remaining one. This is a production in which the design slows down and fluctuates at a lower speed than normal fluctuation. The jackpot expectation suggested by N reach is higher than normal fluctuations and lower than L reach and SP reach, which will be described later. When the special symbol variation effect ends at N reach, the remaining one effect symbol that fluctuates at the low speed stops. In the case of loss, the remaining one staging symbol stops at a staging symbol different from the staging symbol constituting the reach. If the special symbol variation effect does not end in N reach, the remaining one effect symbol changes at high speed again, and develops (switches) from N reach to L reach and SP reach while the reach is maintained.

L-reach is an effect that can be executed at the time of a big hit or a loss, and suggests whether or not the big hit game state is reached, and suggests that there is a possibility of the big hit game state. Further, the L reach is, for example, an effect that can be performed after the N reach, which is performed for a longer time than the N reach, and suggests that the jackpot expectation is higher than the N reach. Even in the L reach, the established reach is maintained, but the effect symbols constituting the reach are reduced, and the predetermined position (for example, the left effect symbol EZ1 described later) that does not interfere with the background image is smaller than in the N reach. At the upper left of the display unit 50a, the right effect symbol EZ3 is moved to the upper right of the display unit 50a), and the background image is switched to the background image dedicated to the L reach (the image dedicated to the L reach is played). In L reach, an animation image by 2DCG is mainly displayed on the display unit 50a. As the production content of L reach, a video of a scene different from the game related to SP reach, which will be described later, is displayed, such as the main character performing special training to learn a special move.

The SP reach can be executed at the time of a big hit or a loss, and is an effect suggesting whether or not the big hit game state is reached, and suggests that there is a possibility of the big hit game state. Furthermore, the SP reach is, for example, an effect that can be performed after the N reach, which is performed for a longer time than the L reach, and suggests that the jackpot expectation is higher than the L reach. Even in the SP reach, the established reach is maintained, but the effect symbols constituting the reach are reduced, and the predetermined position (for example, the left effect symbol EZ1 described later) that does not interfere with the background image is smaller than that in the N reach. At the upper left of the display unit 50a, the right effect symbol EZ3 is moved to the upper right of the display unit 50a), and the background image is switched to the background image dedicated to SP reach (the image dedicated to SP reach is played). In the SP reach, the 3DCG image is mainly displayed on the display unit 50a. Then, as the production content of the SP reach, a video of a scene in which the team to which the hero character belongs and the team to which the rivals of the hero character belong play a match is displayed.

The battle effect is, for example, an effect that can be executed after reaching in a short time state, and is an effect that suggests that the jackpot expectation is higher than the normal fluctuation. Even in the battle effect, the established reach is maintained, but the effect symbols constituting the reach are reduced and the predetermined position (for example, the left effect symbol EZ1 is on the upper left of the display unit 50a and the right effect symbol EZ3 is on the display unit 50a). In the state of moving to the upper right of), it switches to the background image dedicated to the battle production (the video dedicated to the battle production is played). Further, in the battle effect, the 3DCG image is mainly displayed on the display unit 50a.

In addition, in the "state in which the reach is maintained" in the N reach, the L reach, the SP reach, and the battle production, the effect symbols constituting the reach in the N reach, the L reach, the SP reach, and the battle production are displayed in the display unit 50a. Not only the state in which the image is visible in the display unit 50a, but also the state in which the effect symbol constituting the reach is difficult to see or cannot be visually recognized from the display unit 50a for a predetermined period, for example, in relation to the dedicated background image. In addition, the production contents of normal fluctuation, N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle effect can be changed as appropriate. Further, the effects constituting the special figure variation effect are not limited to these, and can be added or reduced as appropriate.

Further, as shown in the second column from the right of the table of FIGS. 11 to 12, it is possible to give a name to the special figure fluctuation pattern by associating the jackpot determination result and the effect content of the special figure fluctuation effect. .. The special map fluctuation pattern related to the jackpot may be collectively referred to as "big hit fluctuation", and the special map fluctuation pattern related to the loss may be collectively referred to as "loss variation".

Furthermore, the special map fluctuation pattern in which SP reach is performed regardless of the jackpot judgment result is "SP reach variation", the special map fluctuation pattern in which L reach is performed is "L reach variation", and the special map variation in N reach. The special figure fluctuation pattern at which the production ends is sometimes collectively referred to as "N reach fluctuation". In addition, the loss fluctuation with reach is referred to as "loss fluctuation with reach", and the loss fluctuation without reach may be collectively referred to as "normal loss fluctuation".

3-2-5. Pre-reading determination The pachinko gaming machine PY can perform pre-reading determination using, for example, a pre-reading determination table as shown in FIGS. 13 to 14, based on the acquired special figure-related determination information, before performing jackpot determination. be. The look-ahead determination table is the type of start port (first start port 11 / second start port 12) related to the start prize, in other words, the type of special figure variably displayed by the start prize (special figure 1 / special figure). It is possible to relate to 2). That is, in the look-ahead determination table, the first look-ahead determination table (FIG. 13) in the case where the first start opening 11 is won and the variable display of the special figure 1 is performed, and the second start opening 12 is won, and the special figure is drawn. There is a second look-ahead determination table (FIG. 14) when the variable display of 2 is performed. The look-ahead determination performed based on the first look-ahead determination table is also referred to as "first look-ahead determination", and the look-ahead determination performed based on the second look-ahead determination table is also referred to as "second look-ahead determination".

Further, the look-ahead determination table can also be associated with a gaming state (normal gaming state / high-probability high-base gaming state / low-probability high-base gaming state) described later. That is, the look-ahead judgment table includes a look-ahead judgment table (a look-ahead judgment table for a normal game state) used in a normal gaming state and a look-ahead judgment table (a high-probability high-base game) used in a high-probability high-base game state. There is a pre-reading determination table for a state) and a pre-reading determination table (a pre-reading determination table for a low-probability high-base gaming state) used in a low-probability high-based gaming state.

That is, the look-ahead determination table includes a first look-ahead determination table used in a normal gaming state, a first look-ahead determination table used in a high-probability high-base gaming state, and a low-probability high-base gaming state. The first look-ahead determination table used, the second look-ahead determination table used in the normal gaming state, the second look-ahead determination table used in the high-probability high-base gaming state, and the low-probability high-base gaming state. There is a second look-ahead determination table used in.

By the look-ahead determination using the look-ahead determination table shown in FIGS. 13 to 14, the special figure fluctuation pattern related to the variable display of the special figure performed by winning the starting ports 11 and 12 is specified. That is, the special figure fluctuation pattern related to the variable display of the special figure is specified as the look-ahead determination result before the variable display of the special figure based on the prize is performed. In the process of specifying the special figure fluctuation pattern, the success or failure of the jackpot is also specified as the look-ahead determination result.

Then, the look-ahead determination result including the information about the special figure fluctuation pattern and the like is associated with the start winning command. As will be described later, the start winning command is transmitted to the staging control board 120 as a look-ahead determination result along with the generation thereof. It should be noted that what kind of information is specified as the look-ahead determination result can be appropriately changed. For example, information on the jackpot symbol type can be included in the look-ahead determination result.

As described above, the special figure display 81 performs variable display of the special figure by performing the big hit determination, the big hit symbol type determination, the reach determination, and the special figure fluctuation pattern determination. Then, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the display result (result of the special symbol lottery) in the variable display of the special symbol, the next variable display of the special symbol is not performed, and the jackpot game is subsequently executed. Next, the jackpot game will be described.

3-3. Big hit game The big hit game consists of multiple round games that involve the opening and closing of the big winning opening 14, the opening (also referred to as OP) from the start of the big hit game to the start of the first round game, and the final round. It includes the ending (also referred to as ED) from the end of the round game to the end of the jackpot game. Each round game begins with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game and ends with the start of the next round game or the start of the ending.

It is possible not to provide OP or ED. Further, in the following, the round game of a predetermined number of times (predetermined order) is simply referred to as a "round". For example, the first round game is also referred to as "1 round (1R)", and the 10th round game is also referred to as "10 round (10R)".

Then, the pachinko gaming machine PY controls the jackpot game by using the jackpot game control table. The jackpot game control table can be set for each type of jackpot symbol. That is, it is possible to associate the jackpot game with the type of jackpot symbol. And one kind or a plurality of kinds of jackpot games can be set.

The jackpot game control table stores elements constituting the jackpot game (big hit game components). The jackpot game components include the number of round games, the number of times the big prize opening 14 is opened in each round game, the type and opening time (opening pattern) of the big winning opening where each opening is performed, and the time to close until the next opening. (Closed time), opening time (opening time), ending time (ending time), etc. are included.

Then, the pachinko gaming machine PY can control the jackpot game by using, for example, the jackpot game control table as shown in FIG. 15 (A). That is, it is possible to set the type of the jackpot game and the jackpot game component for each jackpot game as shown in FIG. 15A. Here, the jackpot game set in FIG. 15A will be described.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol A (hereinafter, also referred to as "first jackpot game"), a round game is performed 10 times. Then, in each round game from 1R to 10R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the big winning opening 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the first big hit game to the start of the first round game. Further, there is an ending in which the closed state of the big winning opening 14 is maintained for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the first big hit game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol B (hereinafter, also referred to as “second jackpot game”), a round game is performed five times. Then, in each round game from 1R to 5R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the big winning opening 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the second big hit game to the start of the first round game. Further, there is an ending in which the closed state of the big winning opening 14 is maintained for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the second big hit game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol C (hereinafter, also referred to as "third jackpot game"), a round game is performed five times. Then, in each round game from 1R to 5R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the big winning opening 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the third big hit game to the start of the first round game. Further, there is an ending in which the closed state of the big winning opening 14 is maintained for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the third big hit game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol D (hereinafter, also referred to as “fourth jackpot game”), a round game is performed 10 times. Then, in each round game from 1R to 10R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the big winning opening 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the fourth big hit game to the start of the first round game. Further, there is an ending in which the closed state of the big winning opening 14 is maintained for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the fourth big hit game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol E (hereinafter, also referred to as "fifth jackpot game"), a round game is performed six times. Then, in each round game from 1R to 6R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the big winning opening 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the fifth big hit game to the start of the first round game. Further, there is an ending in which the closed state of the big winning opening 14 is maintained for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the fifth big hit game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol F (hereinafter, also referred to as "sixth jackpot game"), a round game is performed six times. Then, in each round game from 1R to 6R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the big winning opening 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the sixth big hit game to the start of the first round game. Further, there is an ending in which the closed state of the big winning opening 14 is maintained for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the fifth big hit game.

In each round game, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is detected by the large winning opening sensor 14a, even before the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 14 has elapsed, it is large. The winning opening 14 is closed and the round game ends. In addition, the types and specific contents of the jackpot game components can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in the jackpot game control table shown in FIG. 15A, which type of jackpot game is executed is determined by the type of jackpot symbol, but the jackpot game is executed by a method different from this. You may do so. For example, a device capable of distributing to two winning openings is provided in the game area 6, and if one winning opening is won, only a jackpot game consisting of a predetermined number of round games is executed, while if the other winning opening is won, a predetermined number is specified. Either the jackpot game consisting of more round games and the jackpot game consisting of less than a predetermined number of round games may be executed with a predetermined probability by lottery or the like.

3-4. Game state Next, a game state in which the pachinko gaming machine PY can be controlled will be described. The pachinko gaming machine PY has a jackpot game state in which the jackpot game is executed and a non-big hit game state in which the jackpot game is not executed. The non-big hit game state includes a normal game state, which is a basic base game state, and a specific game state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. Factors that are "advantageous to the player" related to this specific gaming state include the jackpot probability and the ease of opening the second starting port 12. That is, the jackpot probability and the ease of opening the second starting port 12 can be associated with the specific gaming state.

Regarding the jackpot probability, the advantage to the player is that the jackpot probability is higher than that in the normal gaming state, and it becomes easier to win the jackpot. Further, regarding the ease of opening the second starting port 12, the advantage to the player is that the ease of opening the second starting port 12 is higher than in the normal gaming state, and the opening of the second starting port 12 per unit time is higher. It means that the time will be longer.

As the specific gaming state, the first specific gaming state in which both the jackpot probability and the opening time per unit time of the second starting port 12 are advantageous to the player, and the second specific gaming state in which only the jackpot probability is advantageous to the player. It is possible to set three types of a specific gaming state and a third specific gaming state in which only the opening time per unit time of the second starting port 12 is advantageous to the player. It is also possible to mount a part of the three types of specific gaming states without mounting all of these three types of specific gaming states on the pachinko gaming machine PY.

Here, as a partial gaming state focusing on the jackpot probability, a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than that in the normal gaming state and the jackpot probability is advantageous to the player is referred to as a "high probability state". On the other hand, the jackpot probability is the normal probability in the normal gaming state, and the state in which the jackpot probability is not advantageous to the player is called the "normal probability state".

Further, as a partial gaming state focusing on the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time, the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time is longer than that of the normal gaming state, and the second starting port 12 A state in which the ease of opening is advantageous to the player is called a "time saving state". On the other hand, the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time is the opening time in the normal gaming state, and the state in which the ease of opening the second starting port 12 is not advantageous to the player is "non-time saving". It is called "state".

Here, the non-time saving state and the time saving state will be described in detail. As described above, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time is longer than in the non-time saving state. That is, the time saving state is a state in which the second starting port 12 is more likely to win a prize than the non-time saving state. Here, a specific method for making it easier for the second starting port 12 to win a prize in the time saving state than in the non-time saving state will be described.

For example, by setting the time-reduced state to a state in which the fluctuation time of the normal figure is likely to be shorter than that of the non-time-reduced state, it is possible to make it easier for the second starting port 12 to win a prize in the time-reduced state. For example, as described above, regardless of the result of the hit determination, the normal map fluctuation time (5.0 seconds) shorter than the normal map fluctuation time (30.0 seconds) determined in the non-time saving state is set in the time-shortened state. Let it be decided. As a result, the number of times the general drawing lottery is executed per unit time is larger in the time-saving state. In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time saving state and the time saving state, if the probability of winning in the hit determination and the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game are the same, the general drawing lottery per unit time As the number of executions increases, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time becomes longer.

Further, by setting the time saving state to a state in which the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game is likely to be longer than that in the non-time saving state, it is possible to make it easier for the second starting port 12 to win a prize in the time saving state. .. For example, as described above, in the non-time saving state, the electric chew 12D is released for 0.2 seconds in one auxiliary game, whereas in the time saving state, the electric chew 12D is 5.0 in total in one auxiliary game. Try to open for seconds. In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time saving state and the time saving state, if the probability of winning in the hit judgment and the normal figure fluctuation time are the same, the number of times the auxiliary game is executed per unit time becomes the same, so once. Since the opening time of the electric chew 12D in the auxiliary game is long, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time becomes long.

Further, by setting the time-reduced state to a state in which it is easier to determine that the hit is a hit than in the non-time-reduced state, it is possible to make it easier for the second starting port 12 to win a prize in the time-reduced state. For example, as described above, in the non-time saving state, the hit determination is determined to be a hit with a probability of 6600/65536, whereas in the time saving state, the hit determination is determined to be a hit with a probability of 59936/65536. .. In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time saving state and the time saving state, if the opening time of the electric chew 12D and the fluctuation time of the normal figure in one auxiliary game are the same, there is a high probability that the hit determination will determine a hit. Since the number of hit determinations per unit time increases, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time becomes long.

In this way, it is easier to win in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal figure is likely to be short, and the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game is likely to be long. When the three conditions are satisfied, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time becomes longer in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state, and it is possible to easily win a prize in the second starting port 12. As a result, the so-called "base", which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of fired balls, becomes high. Therefore, in a short time state with a high base, it is possible to aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls possessed compared to the normal game state. That is, it can be said that the time-saving state is more advantageous for the player than the non-time-saving state.

In the time saving state, not all three conditions for increasing the opening time per unit time of the second starting port 12 may be satisfied, but only a part of the conditions may be satisfied. Finally, in the time-reduced state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time becomes longer than in the non-time-reduced state, and it is sufficient that the second starting port 12 can be easily won.

In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of executions of the special figure variable display per unit time is small or special by making it easier to select a special figure fluctuation pattern having a shorter special figure fluctuation time than in the non-time saving state. The average of the fluctuation times may be set to be low. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace at which the special figure hold is digested becomes faster, and an effective prize (a prize that can be stored as a special figure hold) to the starting port is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit with the smooth progress of the game.

In the following, the first specific game state is referred to as a "high probability high base game state" and the second specific game state is referred to as a "high probability low" in relation to the content of the advantage to the player for each specific game state. The "base game state" and the third specific game state are also referred to as "low probability high base game state". Further, the normal gaming state is also referred to as a "low probability low base gaming state".

Therefore, it can be said that the low-probability low-base gaming state is a gaming state controlled in a normal probability state and a non-time saving state. Similarly, the low-probability high-base gaming state is controlled in the normal probability state and time-saving state, the high-probability low-base gaming state is controlled in the high-probability state and non-time-saving state, and the high-probability high-base gaming state is controlled in the high-probability state and time-saving state. It can be said that the game is in a state of being.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine PY can be controlled in a low-probability low-base gaming state, a low-probability high-base gaming state, a high-probability low-base gaming state, a high-probability high-base gaming state, and a jackpot gaming state. In the big hit game state, the big winning opening 14 is open for a long time and a large amount of game balls can be acquired. Therefore, the big hit game state can be said to be an advantageous game state for the player. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state and the specific gaming state can be said to be "advantageous gaming states" that are more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.

The high-probability high-base game state and the high-probability low-base game state are more advantageous to the player than the low-probability low-base game state in that the jackpot probability is higher than the normal probability state. be. Further, the high-probability high-base gaming state and the low-probability high-base gaming state are more advantageous to the player than the low-probability low-base gaming state in that the ease of winning the second starting port 12 is higher than the non-time saving state. It is in a gaming state. Furthermore, in the jackpot game state, the first start opening 11 and the big prize opening 14 in which the number of prize balls by one winning is larger than the second start opening 12 are opened, so that the jackpot game state is a low probability low base game. It is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the state.

Further, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine PY is turned on, the normal gaming state is set first. In addition, the jackpot game state is set by displaying the stop of the jackpot symbol. On the other hand, the specific game state is set by winning the big hit and executing the big hit game. Next, the setting of the specific gaming state will be described.

3-5. Setting of specific gaming state The pachinko gaming machine PY can newly set a specific gaming state with the end of the jackpot game. That is, after the jackpot game, the game can be controlled and advanced in a specific game state. The duration of this specific gaming state can be set as appropriate. For example, the specific game state can be continued until the next big hit is won. It is also possible to limit the period during which the specific gaming state can be continued.

When limiting the duration of the specific gaming state, the specific gaming state can be terminated when the termination condition for the continuation period is satisfied. Then, when the specific gaming state ends, the normal gaming state can be set. Further, regarding the high-probability high-base gaming state, when the end condition is satisfied, the low-probability high-base gaming state or the high-probability low-base gaming state can be set. In this case, the newly set low-probability high-base gaming state or high-probability low-base gaming state may be continued until the next big hit is won. Further, the same or different end conditions may be set for the newly set low-probability high-base gaming state or high-probability low-base gaming state, and when the end condition is satisfied, the normal gaming state may be set.

In addition, the end condition for the duration of the specific gaming state can be set as appropriate. As the end condition, for example, the number of executions of the variable display of the special figure can be set. In addition, the number of times the special figure variable display is executed is not limited to the elapsed time after the big hit game, the number of balls launched after the big hit game, the number of passes to the gate 13 after the big hit game, or whether to end the specific game state. It is possible to set the end condition to derive the result of ending in the lottery (so-called "fall lottery"). Further, these elements may be set individually as the end condition, or may be set in combination.

In addition, these end conditions may be set to be the same for all the specific game states that can be set after the big hit game, and may be set for some of the specific game states that can be set. You may. Further, the end condition may be different for each specific game state.

Further, the specific game state controlled after the jackpot game, the presence / absence of the end condition, and the content of the end condition can be associated with the jackpot symbol type related to the jackpot game. For example, when the jackpot symbol type is set as described above, as shown in FIG. 15B, the high-probability high-base game after the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol A, the jackpot symbol B, and the jackpot symbol D is completed. The game may be controlled in the state. Here, this high-probability, high-base game state can be continued until the jackpot is won without setting an end condition. Further, the game may be controlled in a low probability and high base game state after the end of the big hit game related to the big hit symbol C and the big hit symbol E. Here, an end condition can be set for this low-probability high-base game state, and the special figure variable display can be set 100 times as the end condition. The relationship between the jackpot type symbol and the specific gaming state controlled after the jackpot game, the presence / absence of the end condition, and the content of the end condition is an example, and is not limited to this.

In addition, paying attention to the game profit of the big hit, the big hit in which the game progresses in a high probability state after the big hit game is also called "high probability big hit". Further, a jackpot in which the game progresses in a high probability state and a short time state after the jackpot game is also referred to as a "probability change jackpot". In addition, a jackpot in which the game progresses in a normal probability state and a time-saving state after the jackpot game is also referred to as a "time-saving jackpot".

4. Main effects by the gaming machine Next, the main effects performed by the pachinko gaming machine PY will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 32.

4-1. Production mode First, the production mode will be described. The staging mode is a division of staging (or a higher-level conceptual attribute). The pachinko gaming machine PY can set a customer waiting effect mode, a normal effect mode, a probability variation effect mode, a time saving effect mode, and a jackpot effect mode as the effect mode.

In the customer waiting effect mode, the special figure variable display is performed in "low probability low base game state", "low probability high base game state", "high probability low base game state" and "high probability high base game state". This is an effect mode that can be set when there is no special figure and indicates that the standby state is in which the variable display of the special figure is not performed. The customer waiting effect is performed when the customer waiting effect mode is set. In the customer waiting effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 16A, a customer waiting demo video G100 introducing the pachinko gaming machine PY is displayed on the display unit 50a. Further, when the first effect button 40k is operated while the customer waiting demo video G100 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 16B, the setting screen G101 for making settings related to the effect of the pachinko gaming machine PY. Is displayed. The settings related to the effect include a volume setting of the sound output from the speaker 52, a brightness setting of the display unit 50a, a frequency setting of the effect to be executed, and the like. It should be noted that the setting items related to the effect can be appropriately set. It is also possible to prevent the setting screen G101 from being displayed by the player's operation from the customer waiting demo video G100.

The normal effect mode can be set in the "low probability low base game state", and is an effect mode indicating that the game is in the normal game state. Further, a plurality of lower-level effect modes belonging to the normal effect mode can be provided. For example, as the lower hierarchy effect mode belonging to the normal effect mode, a first normal effect mode, a second normal effect mode, a third normal effect mode, and the like can be provided.

In the following, the production mode of the lower hierarchy belonging to the production mode is also referred to as a “production stage”. Along with this, the first normal production mode is also referred to as the "first normal production stage", the second normal production mode is also referred to as the "second normal production stage", and the third normal production mode is also referred to as the "third normal production stage". Say. Unless there are special circumstances, basically, the effect mode set when the special figure fluctuation display is first started after the power of the pachinko gaming machine PY is turned on is the first normal effect stage ( It is assumed that it is the first normal effect mode). However, the type of the effect mode initially set is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate.

When a plurality of production stages belonging to the normal production mode are provided in this way, the production stages can be repeatedly switched in order when a predetermined switching condition is satisfied. The switching condition can be set as appropriate, but for example, the switching condition can be set so that the special figure variable effect is performed a predetermined number of times without winning the jackpot. Further, as the switching condition, it is possible to set that a specific effect such as a special figure variation effect based on the SP reach loss variation is executed.

In addition, as will be described later, a reach may occur in the special figure variation effect, but the special figure variation effect is established for the entire section of the special figure variation effect when the reach does not occur, and the reach when the reach occurs. It can be divided into a front part before the reach and a rear part after the reach is established when the reach occurs. The front part is composed of the above-mentioned "normal fluctuation".

Then, in the front stage portion of the first normal effect stage, a background image (FIG. 17 (A): first normal background image G111) mainly representing the scenery of the city is displayed on the display unit 50a. In the front portion of the second normal effect stage, a background image (FIG. 17 (B): second normal background image G112) mainly representing the ground of the baseball field is displayed on the display unit 50a. In the front portion of the third normal effect stage, a background image (FIG. 17 (C): third normal background image G113) mainly showing the inside of the restaurant is displayed on the display unit 50a. On the other hand, in the latter part of the first normal effect stage to the third normal effect stage, the first normal background image G111, the second normal background image G112, and the third normal background image G113 are not displayed, and the normal effect mode is used. A dedicated background image is displayed according to the type of reach.

The dedicated background image according to the type of reach in the normal effect mode may be a background image common to the normal effect mode regardless of the type of the effect stage, or may be a different background image for each effect stage.

Further, the normal effect mode may be set even in the "high probability low base game state", and the normal effect mode may be set to the effect mode indicating that the non-time saving state is set. Alternatively, a predetermined effect mode that is set only in the "high probability low base game state" and is different from the normal effect mode may be provided. Further, in the low-probability low-base gaming state and the high-probability low-base gaming state that occur under certain conditions, a predetermined staging mode different from the normal staging mode may be set.

The probability variation effect mode can be set in the "high probability high base game state", and is an effect mode indicating that the state is a high probability high base game state. In the pre-stage portion of the probability variation effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 17D, a background image (probability variation background image G120) representing the universe is displayed on the display unit 50a, and the probability variation BGM is output from the speaker 52. .. Further, in the latter part of the probabilistic effect mode, a dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach in the probabilistic effect mode is displayed.

The time saving effect mode can be set in the "low probability high base game state" or the "high probability high base game state", and is either the low probability high base game state or the high probability high base game state, and at least the time reduction. This is an effect mode indicating that the state is in a state. In the front part of the time saving effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 17 (E), a background image representing the sky (time saving background image G130) is displayed on the display unit 50a, and the time saving BGM is output from the speaker 52. .. Further, in the latter part of the time saving effect mode, a dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach in the time saving effect mode is displayed.

The time-saving effect mode is set only in the low-probability high-base game state, and can be set to the effect mode indicating that the time-saving effect mode is the low-probability high-base game state.

Further, for either or either of the probabilistic effect mode and the time-saving effect mode, a plurality of effect stages for the effect mode are further provided as in the normal effect mode, and the effect stage is switched when a predetermined switching condition is satisfied. You can do it.

The jackpot effect mode is an effect mode that can be set when the jackpot game is being performed in the "big hit game state", and is an effect mode indicating that the jackpot game is being performed. In the jackpot effect mode, for example, during the opening of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18A, the opening image G1 suggesting the start of the jackpot game and the right-handed image G2 prompting “right-handed” are displayed on the display unit 50a. Is displayed. The jackpot opening effect is performed. In addition, during the opening, as a jackpot opening effect, a background image (opening background image G200) corresponding to the type of the jackpot game is displayed in the background of the opening image G1 and the right-handed image G2 on the display unit 50a. ..

Further, in the jackpot effect mode, during the round game in the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18B, the right-handed image G2 is continuously displayed from the opening on the display unit 50a, and the round image showing the number of rounds is displayed. A round effect is performed in which the prize ball number image G4 suggesting the G3 and the number of prize balls paid out is displayed. In addition, during the round game, as a round effect, the background of the right-handed image G2, the round image G3, and the prize ball number image G4 on the display unit 50a is a background image (background for the round) according to the type of the jackpot game. The image G201) is displayed, and the BGM corresponding to the type of the jackpot game is output from the speaker 52.

Further, during the ending in the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18C, the display unit 50a suggests the ending image G5 suggesting the effect mode set after the jackpot game and the total number of prize balls paid out. The jackpot ending effect in which the total prize ball number image G6 is displayed is performed. In addition, during the ending, as a jackpot ending effect, a background image (ending background image G202) corresponding to the type of the jackpot game is displayed on the display unit 50a in the background of the ending image G5 and the total prize ball number image G6. Will be done.

In the following, the jackpot opening effect, the round effect, and the jackpot ending effect are collectively referred to as a "big hit game effect" as an effect performed in the jackpot game. That is, the jackpot game effect is performed in the jackpot effect mode.

4-2. Special figure fluctuation effect Next, the special figure variation effect will be described. When the variable display of the special figure is started, the pachinko gaming machine PY has the special figure fluctuation pattern and the special figure lottery result (big hit judgment result, big hit symbol type judgment result, reach judgment result, and The special figure fluctuation effect is executed based on the special figure fluctuation pattern determination result) and the like.

In the special figure variation effect, the display unit 50a superimposes the variation display of the effect symbol on the predetermined background image. In the variable display of the staging symbol, the staging symbol stops after the staging symbol fluctuates. That is, after the special symbol fluctuation time and the variation display of the staging symbol are performed, the variation is stopped and the staging symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, basically, the result of the special figure lottery is notified by the stop display of the effect symbol.

In the special figure variation effect performed by the display unit 50a, it is possible to use an image other than the variation display of the effect symbol. Further, in addition to the image display device 50 including the display unit 50a, various effect devices such as a speaker 52, a frame lamp 53, a panel movable device 55, a first effect button device 40, and a second effect button device 41 are used. It is possible to perform a figure variation effect.

Next, in the special figure variation effect executed in response to the special figure variable display, the effect symbol displayed on the display unit 50a will be described. The staging symbol is also identification information for showing the result of the special drawing lottery, and a plurality of types are provided. In detail, one of the constituent elements of the staging symbol constitutes identification information for showing the special figure lottery result, and a plurality of types of staging symbols are provided depending on the difference in the identification information.

For example, as shown in FIG. 19A, the effect symbols may be composed of numbers 1 to 9, and nine effect symbols may be provided. Then, the effect symbol including the number "1" is referred to as the effect symbol G10a. Similarly, the staging symbols including the numbers "2" to "9" are referred to as the staging symbols G10b to the staging symbols G10e. For convenience, when individual staging symbols are handled without distinction, they are collectively referred to as "staging symbol G10".

In addition, the numerical parts of the staging symbols G10c and G10g related to "3" and "7" are red, and "1", "2", "4", "5", "6", "8", and The numerical portions of the effect symbols G10a, G10b, G10d, G10e, G10f, G10h, and G10i of "9" are blue. That is, colors are included in the constituent elements of the effect symbol G10. The configuration of the effect symbol G10 and what the identification information is set to may be appropriately changed. For example, other components such as a character associated with each number may be added to the effect symbol G10.

Subsequently, the effect symbol display area for displaying the effect symbol G10 will be described. For example, as shown in FIG. 19B, the left side, the center, and the right side of the display unit 50a divided into three substantially evenly in the horizontal direction are the left effect symbol area 50b1, the middle effect symbol area 50b2, and the right effect symbol. The region can be 50b3. The effect symbol G10 is displayed in any of the left effect symbol area 50b1, the middle effect symbol area 50b2, and the right effect symbol area 50b3.

Then, mainly, in the front stage portion of the special symbol variation effect, the effect symbol G10 displayed in the left effect symbol area 50b1 is collectively referred to as "left effect symbol EZ1", and the effect symbol G10 displayed in the middle effect symbol area 50b2 is referred to. The effect symbol G10 displayed in the right effect symbol area 50b3 is collectively referred to as "right effect symbol EZ3". That is, in the left effect symbol area 50b1, the middle effect symbol area 50b2, and the right effect symbol area 50b3, the effect symbol G10 consisting of numbers 1 to 9 is commonly displayed, but the effect symbols are displayed at relative display positions. When distinguishing G10, it is referred to as a left effect symbol EZ1, a middle effect symbol EZ2, and a right effect symbol EZ3.

As will be described later, in the special symbol variation effect, the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, but finally, the special symbol lottery result (big hit determination result, jackpot symbol type, reach determination result) is shown. The stop display of the staging symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed in the embodiment. Then, when the jackpot is notified as a result of the special figure lottery, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed so that three effect symbols G10 having the same number are arranged side by side (so-called "doublet"). Therefore, in the following, the effect symbol G10 composed of the same numbers constituting the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that are stopped and displayed when the jackpot is notified is referred to as a "big hit effect symbol". For example, when the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed as "7, 7, 7", the jackpot effect symbol is "effect symbol G10 g", and when the effect symbols are stopped and displayed as "9, 9, 9", the jackpot effect symbol is "7, 7, 9". It becomes a staging pattern G10i. Further, the jackpot effect symbol may be abbreviated by the number included in the effect symbol. For example, if the jackpot effect symbol is "effect symbol G10g", the jackpot effect symbol is "7", and if the jackpot effect symbol is "effect symbol G10i", the jackpot effect symbol is "9". Further, as will be described later, in the special figure variation effect, the special figure lottery result is completely shown when the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are deterministically stopped and displayed. However, basically, the staging symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are tentatively stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) before the staging symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are deterministically stopped and displayed in the middle of the special symbol variation effect. This is because the contents of the staging symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that have been temporarily stopped and displayed may be changed. For example, after the staging symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a mode showing a jackpot (relatively disadvantageous to the player), the mode is changed to show another jackpot (relatively advantageous to the player). May be done. Therefore, the staging symbol G10 consisting of the same numbers constituting the staging symbols EZ1 to EZ3 when the staging symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed (before being changed) in such a manner that the jackpot is first indicated. Is also referred to as a "big hit production design".

Further, in the special symbol variation effect, the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, but in the middle of the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 are the effect symbols G10 having the same number. Reach may be performed to temporarily display the stop (temporary stop display). As will be described later, the reach is a production that suggests that there is a possibility of a jackpot gaming state, and the reach is performed, which means that the chance for the jackpot is increased. Therefore, the effect symbol G10 composed of the same numbers constituting the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 related to the reach is referred to as a "reach effect symbol". For example, when the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed on the effect symbol G10a of "1", the reach effect symbol is "effect symbol G10a" and temporarily stopped and displayed on the effect symbol G10a of "3". , The reach effect symbol is "effect symbol G10c". Further, the reach effect symbol may be abbreviated by a number included in the effect symbol. For example, if the reach effect symbol is "effect symbol G10a", the reach effect symbol is abbreviated as "1", and if the reach effect symbol is "effect symbol G10c", the reach effect symbol is abbreviated as "3".

Further, as shown in FIG. 19B, it is possible to provide a small symbol area 50c for variably displaying a small symbol in one section of the left end (lower left corner) of the lower end portion of the display unit 50a. In the small symbol area 50c, the small symbol can be variably displayed according to the variable display of the special symbol. The design of the small symbol can be set as appropriate, but for example, the numerical portion of the staging symbol G10 can be reduced as it is to be configured.

In FIG. 19B, the left effect symbol area 50b1, the middle effect symbol area 50b2, the right effect symbol area 50b3, and the small symbol area 50c are clearly indicated by a alternate long and short dash line, but this is the left effect symbol area 50b1. It is described to represent the range of the middle effect symbol area 50b2, the right effect symbol area 50b3, and the small symbol area 50c, and is not actually displayed.

Further, as described above, as the effects constituting the effect flow of the special figure variation effect, there are normal variation, N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle effect. Here, some of these will be described.

4-2-1. Normal fluctuation The pachinko gaming machine PY can first perform normal fluctuation in the special figure fluctuation production. The normal fluctuation functions as an effect suggesting that the variable display of the special figure has started. Next, the normal fluctuation will be specifically described. As small symbols, the left small symbol KZ1, the medium small symbol KZ2, and the right small symbol KZ3 corresponding to the left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2, and the right effect symbol EZ3 are variably displayed in the small symbol area 50c.

For example, as shown in FIG. 20A, the left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2, and the right effect symbol EZ3 are stopped and displayed on the display unit 50a, and the left small symbol KZ1, the medium and small symbols KZ2, and the right small are displayed. When the variable display of the special figure is started from the state where the symbol KZ3 is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the special figure is not performed, and the variable display of the special figure is waiting, FIG. 20 (B). As shown in, the special figure fluctuation effect is started with the start. Specifically, the variation display of the staging symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is started, and the variation display of the left small symbol KZ1, the medium and small symbols KZ2, and the right small symbol KZ3 is started.

It is possible to make the display mode of the variable display of the staging symbols EZ1 to EZ3 different from the display mode of the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3. For example, the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed by scrolling the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 from the top to the bottom of the display unit 50a, and the variation display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed by displaying each small symbol KZ1 to KZ3. It may be replaced one after another at a fixed position. The display mode of the variable display of the staging symbols EZ1 to EZ3 may be the same as the display mode of the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3.

Further, the staging symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are variablely displayed at high speed immediately after the start of the variable display. While the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are variablely displayed at high speed, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are basically images on the background side such as background images G111 to G114. Is displayed with transparency that is easy to see.

Then, if the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is the special figure fluctuation pattern of the loss without reach (for example, the normal loss fluctuation), the variable display of the special figure ends without the reach occurring (special figure). (Stop display), the staging symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed with the loss stitches (so-called “barracuda stitches”) peculiar to the loss without reach.

Toward the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, for example, first, as shown in FIG. 20 (C), the left effect symbol EZ1 temporarily stops (temporarily stops) at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and then the figure. As shown in FIG. 20 (D), the right effect symbol EZ3 is temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and further, as shown in FIG. 20 (E), the middle effect symbol EZ2 is approximately in the vertical direction. Temporarily stop (temporarily stop) at the center position.

Finally, as shown in FIG. 20 (F), the staging symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that are temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) in a state of being lined up in the horizontal direction at a substantially central position in the vertical direction are completely all at once. The stop is confirmed (the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed). When the staging symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that have been temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) are completely stopped at different points, that is, when a definite stop display of the staging symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the three small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 stops all at once with the same variation as the staging symbols EZ1 to EZ3, and the stop display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is also performed.

Note that the temporary stop of the staging symbols EZ1 to EZ3 means that the staging symbols EZ1 to EZ3 do not move significantly in the place as in the scroll display, but slightly shake or reciprocate on the spot. Therefore, strictly speaking, the state in which the staging symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed is different from the state in which the staging symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are definitively stopped and displayed. A definite stop display may be broadly referred to as a "stop display". Further, in the example of FIG. 20, when the stop display of the staging symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the staging symbols are stopped in the order of left staging symbol EZ1 → right staging symbol EZ3 → middle staging symbol EZ2, but the order in which they are stopped ( The method) is not limited to this, and can be set as appropriate.

4-2-2. Reach Next, the establishment of reach will be explained. Even when the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is the special figure fluctuation pattern of the loss with reach (for example, the N loss fluctuation), basically, the display unit 50a has the same as the case without the reach described above. As shown in FIG. 21 (A), the variable display of the special figure is started from the state where the staging symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are deterministically stopped and displayed and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 21B, the variation display of the staging symbols EZ1 to EZ3 starts, and the variation display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 starts.

Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time, as shown in FIG. 21 (C), the left effect symbol EZ1 according to the number "5" is temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and then, FIG. As shown in 21 (D), the right effect symbols EZ3 having the same number "5" are arranged horizontally at substantially the center position in the vertical direction and temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) to establish reach. When the reach is established, an image (reach establishment suggestion image) G11 indicating that the reach is established is displayed. Even if the reach is established by the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3, the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is continuously performed.

Further, in the example of FIG. 21, when the reach is established, the staging symbols are temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) in the order of the left staging symbol EZ1 → the right staging symbol EZ3, but the order (method) of the temporary stop is this. It is not limited to, and can be set as appropriate. Further, the number of the staging pattern constituting the reach is not limited to "5". Further, the position of temporary stop (temporary stop) is not limited to the substantially central position in the vertical direction. Further, the direction in which the effect symbols constituting the reach are lined up is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be another direction such as an oblique direction.

In this way, the entire period of the special map variation effect when there is no reach loss and the section from the start of the special map variation effect when reach occurs to the time when the reach is established can be set as normal fluctuations. However, the time until the reach is established can be appropriately set based on the special figure fluctuation pattern and the like. Furthermore, it is also possible to execute various notice effects such as so-called "pseudo-ren", cut-in notice, and dialogue notice until the reach is established. Alternatively, it is possible to enter the so-called "zone" until the reach is established.

4-2-3. The N-reach pachinko gaming machine PY can perform N-reach when the reach is established after the normal fluctuation. The N reach is a production that suggests that the lottery result of the special drawing lottery may have been a "big hit", and functions as a production for making the player expect a big hit. Next, N reach will be specifically described.

When the reach is established, for example, as shown in FIG. 21 (D), N reach is performed from that point. In N reach, as shown in FIG. 22 (A), the state when the reach is established is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). When the N reach is started, as shown in FIG. 22 (B), the medium effect symbol EZ2, which is displaying (scrolling) at high speed in the normal mode, gradually decelerates.

If the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is the special figure fluctuation pattern of loss with reach (for example, N loss fluctuation), the middle effect symbol EZ2 is provisionally placed at the substantially center position in the vertical direction from the state where the reach is established. The stop display of the effect symbol indicating the loss is performed by stopping (temporarily stopping). At this time, since the reach is established, as shown in FIG. 22 (C-1), a medium effect symbol composed of a number different from the numbers constituting the reach (“4” in FIG. 22 (C-1)). EZ2 temporarily stops. Then, with the end of the variable display of the special figure (stop display of the special figure), as shown in FIG. 22 (D), the temporary stop state becomes a complete stop state, and the loss is peculiar to the loss with reach. The left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2, and the right effect symbol EZ3 are stopped and displayed.

3 The two small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped all at once with the same loss as the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, which is peculiar to the loss with reach, and the stop display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is also performed. The contents of N reach can be changed or added as appropriate.

When the special figure variation effect does not end at N reach, as shown in FIG. 22 (C-2), the remaining one medium effect symbol EZ2 that has not stopped fluctuates again at high speed, and N while the reach is maintained. It may develop (switch) from reach to L reach or SP reach.

4-2-4. The L-reach pachinko gaming machine PY can perform L-reach after N-reach. The L reach is an effect that suggests that the possibility that the result of the special drawing lottery is a "big hit" is higher than that of the N reach, and functions as an effect for the player to expect a big hit. Although the established reach is maintained even in the L reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 23 (A), at the start of the L reach, the staging symbols EZ1 and EZ3 constituting the reach are reduced and displayed. The left effect symbol EZ1 moves to a predetermined position (for example, the left effect symbol EZ1 is on the upper left of the display unit 50a, and the right effect symbol EZ3 is on the upper right of the display unit 50a) in the unit 50a so as not to overlap the small symbol area 50c.

Further, at the start of L reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 23A, a background image dedicated to L reach (background image G114 for L reach) is displayed on the display unit 50a. The background image G114 for L reach is composed of a moving image developed by a predetermined Thule. The content of the story of the moving image related to the background image G114 for L reach can be appropriately set, but in the basic embodiment, the main character confesses to the girl.

When the background image G114 for L reach is displayed, it starts from a scene where the main character is waiting for a girl at a meeting place as shown in FIG. 23 (A). Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 23 (B), a girl appears at the meeting place. At this time, at the substantially center of the display unit 50a, the effect symbol of the number "5" constituting the reach and the effect symbol of the number "4" not constituting the reach appear as the middle effect symbol EZ2. Then, it slowly rotates so that it comes out from the back side to the front side and then returns to the back side.

While the effect symbol of the number "4" and the effect symbol of the number "5" are continuously rotated, the Thule related to the background image G114 for L reach progresses. Then, as shown in FIG. 23 (C), the main character character confesses to the girl. At this time, at the substantially center of the display unit 50a, the effect symbol of the number "5" constituting the reach and the effect symbol of the number "4" not constituting the reach will mutually repel the opponent. Collide with each other. Since the staging symbol of the number "5" constitutes the reach and the staging symbol of the number "4" does not constitute the reach, the staging symbol of the number "4" is skipped and the staging symbol of the number "5" is If it remains, the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 showing the jackpot is established, while the effect symbol of the number "5" is skipped and the effect symbol of the number "4" remains, the effect of the aspect showing the reach loss. The stop display of the symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is established. Therefore, the scene of FIG. 23 (C) is the final phase of the L reach, and the effect suggesting a big hit (big hit suggestion effect) is executed or the effect suggesting a loss (loss suggestion effect) is executed. It constitutes a branch point that branches into a crab (so-called "winning branch point").

When the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is the jackpot fluctuation (L jackpot fluctuation) at the hit branch point, as shown in FIG. 24 (A-1), a smiling girl is up on the display unit 50a. After being displayed, as shown in FIG. 24 (B-1), the main character who is happy to succeed in confession is displayed, and a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker 52. At this time, along with the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 of the number "5" constituting the reach, the middle effect symbol EZ2 of the number "5" constituting the reach is temporarily stopped at the center of the display unit 50a. Displayed in mode. That is, the staging symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a big hit.

The display of the hero character who is happy to succeed in confession and the output of a predetermined sound effect constitute a jackpot suggestion effect. After the jackpot suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 24 (C-1), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the jackpot.

On the other hand, if the special map fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special map is the loss variation with reach (L loss variation) after the hit branch point, the figure is shown in the background image G114 for L reach without performing the jackpot suggestion effect. As shown in FIG. 24 (A-2), after a girl with a sad expression is displayed up on the display unit 50a, as shown in FIG. 24 (B-2), she fails to confess and is disappointed. The main character is displayed. At this time, along with the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 of the number "5" constituting the reach, the middle effect symbol EZ2 of the number "5" not constituting the reach is temporarily stopped at the center of the display unit 50a. It is displayed in. That is, the staging symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating reach loss.

The display of the hero character who fails to confess and is discouraged constitutes a loss suggestion effect. After the loss suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 24 (C-2), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed with the loss stitches for reach.

4-2-5. SP reach Further, the pachinko gaming machine PY can perform SP reach after N reach. The SP reach is an effect that suggests that the possibility that the result of the special drawing lottery is a "big hit" is higher than that of the L reach, and functions as an effect for the player to expect a big hit. Although the established reach is maintained even in the SP reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (A), at the start of the SP reach, the staging symbols EZ1 and EZ3 constituting the reach are reduced and displayed. The left effect symbol EZ1 moves to a predetermined position (for example, the left effect symbol EZ1 is on the upper left of the display unit 50a, and the right effect symbol EZ3 is on the upper right of the display unit 50a) in the unit 50a so as not to overlap the small symbol area 50c.

Further, at the start of SP reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 25A, a background image dedicated to SP reach (background image G115 for SP reach) is displayed on the display unit 50a. The background image G115 for SP reach is composed of a moving image developed by a predetermined Thule. The content of the story of the video related to the background image G115 for SP reach can be set as appropriate, but in the basic embodiment, the main character and the enemy character, which is a rival of the main character, confront each other. ing. The main character is a baseball pitcher, and the enemy character is a baseball batter, who face each other in a baseball game as a pitcher and a batter.

When the background image G115 for SP reach is displayed, an enemy character first appears as shown in FIG. 25 (A), and then, as shown in FIG. 25 (B), in the center of the display unit 50a. An image (SP reach start title image) G11 indicating that the SP reach has been started is displayed. The SP reach start title image G11 is composed of a title image G11a representing the title of the SP reach "" Beat the enemy batter XX !! "in FIG. 25 (B)" and an effect image G11b that enhances the title image G11a. To.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25 (C), a scene in which the main character and the enemy character are facing each other is displayed. After that, in the background image G115 for SP reach, the main character throws the ball as shown in FIG. 26 (A), and the ball advances toward the enemy character as shown in FIG. 26 (B). As shown in C), the enemy character begins to swing the bat. Then, as shown in FIG. 26 (D), the ball and the bat approach each other, and the confrontation between the main character and the enemy character is about to be settled. This scene constitutes a turning point (winning turning point) in which the main character wins in the confrontation between the pitcher and the batter and a big hit is suggested or a defeat is suggested and a loss is suggested.

After this hit branch point, if the special map fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special map is a jackpot fluctuation (SP jackpot fluctuation), as shown in FIG. 27 (A-1), the enemy character makes a missed swing on the display unit 50a. After winning the confrontation, as shown in FIG. 27 (B-1), the main character who strikes out the enemy character and screams on the mound is displayed, and a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker 52. Will be done. At this time, the staging symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a big hit.

The display of the main character who wins the confrontation and screams, and the output of a predetermined sound effect constitute a jackpot suggestion effect. After the jackpot suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 27 (C-1), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the jackpot.

On the other hand, if the special map fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special map is the reach loss variation (SP loss variation) after the hit branch point, the SP reach background image G115 shows FIG. 27 (SP reach loss variation) without the jackpot suggestion effect. As shown in A-2), the enemy character hits a home run and loses the confrontation, and as shown in FIG. 27 (B-2), the main character is disappointed on the mound. At this time, the staging symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating reach loss.

The display of the hero character who is defeated in the confrontation and is discouraged constitutes a loss suggestion effect. After the loss suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 27 (C-2), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed with the loss stitches for reach.

Next, the movable body effect and the operation effect performed in the special figure variation effect will be described. The movable body effect and the operation effect are independent of these effects when they are performed as a part of these effects in a form incorporated into the above-mentioned SP reach, L reach, N reach, and even a jackpot game effect. May be done. First, the movable body production will be described.

4-3. Movable body effect The pachinko gaming machine PY can perform a movable body effect accompanied by an operation of a movable body at a predetermined timing in a predetermined effect such as a special figure variation effect or a jackpot game effect. The movable body effect is an effect using a movable device such as a board movable device 55, and functions as an effect suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit and the development to SP reach.

For example, when the movable body effect functions as an effect suggesting the development to SP reach, as shown in FIG. 28 (A), when the special figure variation effect develops from N reach to SP reach, first of all, FIG. 28. As shown in (B), the board movable device 55 operates, the board movable body 55k descends to the operating position in front view, and is held at that position for a predetermined time. Further, at this time, the effect image G13 accompanying the operation of the movable board 55k is also displayed on the entire display unit 50a. Then, as shown in FIG. 28C, the effect image G13 is erased, the board movable body 55k rises to the standby position, and the board movable device 55 returns to the normal standby state. When the board movable device 55 returns to the normal standby state, it develops into SP reach. The operation content of the movable device in the movable body effect can be changed or added as appropriate.

4-4. Operation effect Next, the operation effect will be described. The pachinko gaming machine PY has an operation promotion effect and an operation result effect according to the operation of the first effect button 40k, the second effect button 41k, etc. at a predetermined timing in a predetermined effect such as a special figure variation effect or a jackpot game effect. It is possible to perform an operation effect including. The operation promotion effect is an effect that encourages the player to operate the operation means, and the operation result effect is an effect that is performed according to the operation of the operation means in the operation promotion effect. Functions as a production.

For example, as described above, when the winning branch point is reached in the L reach or SP reach, a period during which the pressing operation of the first effect button 40k is valid (operation valid period) occurs, and the operation valid period occurs. As shown in FIG. 29 (A), an effect (operation promotion effect) for encouraging the operation of the first effect button 40k is performed.

In the operation promotion effect, the first effect button operation promotion effect image G12 is displayed on the display unit 50a. The first effect button operation promotion effect image G12 is an image (operation target image) G12a representing the first effect button 40k, which is an operation target, and an image (that is, pressing operation) representing an operation mode (that is, pressing operation) of the first effect button 40k. The operation image) G12b and an image (operation valid period remaining time image) G12c showing the remaining time of the operation valid period (operation valid period) related to the operation of the first effect button 40k are included.

The operation valid period remaining time image G12c is composed of a generally curved progress bar, and changes with the passage of time so that the player can easily understand the remaining operation valid period time. Note that FIG. 29B shows a state in which the operation valid period has occurred and one-third of the operation valid time has elapsed.

If the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is a jackpot fluctuation (SP jackpot fluctuation), the first effect button is pressed after the first effect button 40k is pressed during the operation valid period, or the first effect button is pressed during the operation valid period. After the remaining time of the operation valid period is exhausted without operating 40k, the operation result effect is performed.

As an operation result effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 29 (C), the board movable device 55 is operated, the board movable body 55k is lowered to the operating position, held at that position for a predetermined time, and the rotating member 55k1 is produced. Rotates for a predetermined time. In this way, the operation result effect includes the movable body effect. Further, at this time, as an operation result effect, the effect image G13 accompanying the operation of the board movable body 55k is displayed on the entire display unit 50a. Then, as shown in FIG. 29 (D), the effect image G13 is erased, the rotation of the rotating member 55k1 is stopped, and the board movable body 55k is raised, so that the operation result production is completed. When the operation result effect is completed, a jackpot suggestion effect is performed.

On the other hand, if the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is reach loss fluctuation (SP loss fluctuation), even if the first effect button 40k is pressed or the first effect button 40k is pressed during the operation valid period. Even if the remaining time of the effect button operation valid period is exhausted without being performed, the operation result effect is not performed and the loss suggestion effect is performed.

The operation result effect is not limited to the operation of the panel movable device 55 and the display of the effect image G13, and can be appropriately changed or added. In addition, the operation effect is not limited to the special figure variation effect, but can also be executed in the jackpot effect.

4-5. Look-ahead effect Next, the look-ahead effect that can be executed before the special figure variable display that is the target of the special figure hold is executed will be described. The pachinko gaming machine PY can perform a look-ahead effect for the special figure 1 hold or the special figure 2 hold for which the jackpot judgment has not been performed, based on the result of the look-ahead determination at any timing of the special figure variation effect. .. The look-ahead effect is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit for the special figure 1 hold or the special figure 2 hold, and functions as an effect that makes the big hit expected even before the variable display of the special figure corresponding to the hold. As an example of the look-ahead effect, there is a hold change notice using a hold effect indicating a special figure hold. Here, the hold effect performed in the normal effect mode and the hold change notice will be described.

As shown in FIG. 30A, the hold display is performed in the hold display area 50d formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a substantially central section at the lower end of the display unit 50a. The hold display area 50d is composed of a first area 50d1, a second area 50d2, a third area 50d3, and a fourth area 50d4, which are obtained by dividing the hold display area 50d into four substantially evenly in the left-right direction. That is, in the hold display area 50d, the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 are provided side by side in order from the left end to the right end.

In the first region 50d1, the special figure 1 variable display is the first to occur in the special figure 1 hold, and the special figure 1 variable display is the first to occur based on the special figure 1 related random number corresponding to the special figure 1 hold. The hold icon indicating the special figure 1 hold is displayed. Similarly, in the second region 50d2 to the fourth region 50d4, it occurs second to fourth in the reserved special figure 1 hold, and is based on the special figure 1 related random number corresponding to the special figure 1 hold. The hold icon indicating the hold of the special figure 1 in which the special figure 1 variable display is performed is displayed in the 2nd to 4th positions.

In the following, the special figure 1 hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the first area 50d1 is referred to as "special figure 1 hold in the hold order 1". Similarly, the special figure 1 hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the second area 50d2, the third area 50d3, and the fourth area 50d4 is referred to as "special figure 1 hold in hold order 2" and "hold order 3". It is referred to as "special figure 1 hold" and "special figure 1 hold in hold order 4". That is, the existing special figure 1 hold is referred to as "hold order 1" to "hold order 4" in the order of occurrence.

Further, the display area 50e is formed on the left side of the hold display area 50d. In the display area 50e, the icon representing the currently executed special figure 1 variable display is displayed. Therefore, the target indicated by the icon displayed in the display area 50e is different from the target indicated by the hold icon displayed in the hold display area 50d. Although not included, the display of the hold icon and the display of the icon are related to each other. Therefore, in the following, the display of the hold icon and the display of the icon are collectively referred to as a “hold effect”. In addition, the hold icon and the icon are collectively referred to as an "icon". Further, the running special figure 1 variation display indicated by the icon is also referred to as “the variation”.

In FIG. 30A, the reserved display area 50d and the display area 50e are indicated by a alternate long and short dash line, and the first region 50d1 to the fourth region 50d4 are indicated by a broken line. It is described to represent the range of one area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 and the display area 50e, and is not actually displayed.

Next, a specific example of the hold effect will be described. In the following description, the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 will be omitted. As a premise, it is assumed that the special figure 1 change is being displayed (the special figure change is being produced), and the special figure 1 hold number (U1) is "2". Under this circumstance, as shown in FIG. 30 (B), in the above-mentioned first area 50d1 (not shown), the special figure 1 hold (holding order) that occurred first among the special figure 1 hold currently held. The hold icon HA2 representing the special figure 1 hold of 1 is displayed, and in the above-mentioned second area 50d2 (not shown), the special figure 1 hold (hold order 2) that occurs after the special figure 1 hold represented by the hold icon HA2 is displayed. The hold icon HA3 indicating the special figure 1 hold) is displayed. Further, in the display area 50e (not shown) described above, the icon HA1 representing the currently executed special figure 1 variation display is displayed. The display mode of the icons HA1 to HA3 displayed in FIG. 30B is a normal mode.

As described above, in the hold effect, the hold display area 50d is displayed side by side from the left end to the right in the order in which the special figure 1 hold occurs. That is, the variable display of the reserved special symbol, in other words, the variable display of the unexecuted special symbol based on the special symbol-related determination information stored in the special symbol reservation storage unit 105, is individually displayed by the hold icon. To.

Then, as shown in FIG. 30C, when the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the icon HA1 representing the special figure variation display being executed until immediately before that is deleted. Subsequently, when the variable display of the special symbol (special figure variation effect) is started based on the special figure 1 hold representing the hold icon HA2, the hold icon HA2 and the hold icon HA3 shift. Specifically, the hold icon HA2 displayed in the first area 50d1 (not shown) moves to the display area 50e (not shown), and the hold icon HA3 displayed in the second area 50d2 (not shown) is not shown. Move to the first region 50d1 of. That is, the displayed hold icon HA2 and hold icon HA3 are shifted to the left by one each. This is because the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon HA2 is started, and the special figure 1 hold represented by the hold icon HA3 is the earliest occurrence of the special figure 1 hold currently held. This is to adapt the hold icon HA2 and the hold icon HA3 to the situation according to the variable display of the special figure to be started next.

Further, since the hold icon HA2 displayed in the display area 50e represents the execution special figure 1 variable display, it becomes the icon HA2 when it is displayed in the display area 50e. That is, as a word attached before the "icon", the icon displayed in the hold display area 50d is referred to as "hold", and the icon displayed in the display area 50e is referred to as "corresponding". In other words, when the hold icon is displayed and the start condition for the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied for the special symbol hold indicated by the hold icon, the variable display of the special symbol related to the establishment of the start condition is displayed. The corresponding hold icon is displayed as the icon.

In addition, when the icon is changed from the hold icon to the icon, in other words, when the icon is moved from the hold display area 50d to the display area 50e, the size of the icon may remain the same or may be enlarged. In FIG. 30C, the icon is magnified about twice when moving from the hold display area 50d to the display area 50e.

Then, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 11 from this situation and the special figure 1 hold occurs, as shown in FIG. 30 (E), a new hold occurs in response to the occurrence of the special figure 1 hold. The icon HA4 is displayed in the above-mentioned second area 50d2 (not shown).

In this way, when a prize is won in the first starting port 11 and a random number related to the special figure 1 is acquired, one common icon is displayed. This icon disappears when the special figure 1 variable display based on the prize is completed, but while it is displayed, the state in which the special figure 1 variable display is placed (pending state and running state). Depending on the situation, it will exist under different names (holding icon and relevant icon).

By the way, as described above, the start winning command includes the winning / failing information and the special figure fluctuation pattern information. Then, the pachinko gaming machine PY can display the hold icon in a normal mode or a special mode based on the pass / fail information and the special figure fluctuation pattern information. Displaying this hold icon in a special manner is called "hold notice".

When the display mode of the hold icon is a special mode, that is, when the hold notice is given, the player can expect that the jackpot may be won by the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon. Next, a specific example of the hold notice will be described. As a specific example of the hold notice, it is assumed that the display mode of the hold icon HA4 shown in FIG. 30 (E) is a special mode.

As one type of hold notice, it becomes a special mode immediately after the hold icon is displayed, in other words, the hold notice is given when the special figure 1 hold occurs (when the first starting port 11 is won). There is a type. For example, as shown in FIG. 31 (A), from the situation before the hold icon HA4 is displayed (the situation in FIG. 30 (D)), the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 11 and the special figure 1 is held. When the above-mentioned event occurs, the hold icon HA4 in the normal mode is displayed in the above-mentioned second area 50d2 (not shown) in response to the occurrence of the special figure 1 hold, as in the case of FIG. 30 (E). In the drawing, the hold icon in the normal mode seems to be completely stationary, but in reality, basically, even if it is made completely stationary, the display position does not move, but the display position does not move. It may be configured to shake lightly in the field.

Immediately after that, as shown in FIG. 31 (B), the display mode of the hold icon HA4 changes from the normal mode to the special mode (gray in FIG. 31 (B)) (hold notice is given). In the example of FIG. 31, the hold icon HA4 is displayed in the normal mode for a moment immediately after the display, but it may be displayed in the special mode and the period displayed in the normal mode may be eliminated.

As another type of hold notice, there is a hold notice type that becomes a special mode when the hold icon moves, in other words, the hold icon change notice is given at the time of the shift of the special figure 1 hold. For example, as shown in FIG. 32 (A), from the situation before the hold icon HA4 is displayed (the situation in FIG. 30 (D)), the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 11 and the special figure 1 is held. When the above-mentioned second region 50d2 (not shown) is generated, as shown in FIG. Is displayed in.

Then, as shown in FIG. 32 (C), when the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the icon HA2 representing the special figure variation display being executed until immediately before that is deleted. Subsequently, when the variable display of the special symbol (special figure variation effect) is started based on the special figure 1 hold represented by the hold icon HA3, it is displayed in the first area 50d1 as shown in FIG. 32 (D). The hold icon HA3 is moved to the display area 50e (not shown), and the hold icon HA4 displayed in the second area 50d2 is moved to the first area 50d1 (not shown). Here, when the hold icon HA4 moves from the second area 50d2 to the first area 50d1, the display mode changes from the normal mode to the special mode (gray in FIG. 32 (D)) (hold notice is given). ..

In addition, it is possible to provide a plurality of types of special modes related to the hold notice so that the jackpot expectation degree differs depending on the type of the special mode. For example, it is assumed that the display mode of the hold icon is associated with the color of the hold icon, and white, green, red, and gold are set as the display mode of the hold icon. Here, white is a normal embodiment, and green, red, and gold are special embodiments. Then, the jackpot expectation degree indicated by the display mode of the hold icon can be set so as to increase in the order of white <green <red <gold.

The look-ahead effect can be performed on both or one of the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold. Further, the look-ahead effect is not limited to the display mode of the hold icon HA, for example, an image other than the hold icon HA on the display unit 50a such as a background image, a sound output from the speaker 52, light emission by the frame lamp 53, and a movable board. It is possible to execute the operation by using an effect device other than the image display device 50 such as the operation by the device 55. Furthermore, as an effect mode of the look-ahead effect, in addition to the effect mode that continues uninterrupted from the execution such as the hold icon change notice by the hold icon HA until the special figure change display is started, the effect symbol is stopped. It may be an effect mode that is executed intermittently and continuously, such as every time the display is performed or every time the variable display of the effect symbol is started.

5. Game control by the game control microcomputer 101 [Game control main processing]
Next, the game control by the game control microcomputer 101 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 42. The flowchart for controlling the game described below is an example. Then, the plurality of processes in the flowchart can be appropriately changed in the execution order or executed in parallel as long as the processing contents do not conflict with each other.

Further, a counter, a timer, a flag, a status, a buffer, and the like appearing in the game control by the game control microcomputer 101 described below are provided in the game RAM 104. Further, the initial value of the counter is "0", the initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", and the initial value of the status is "1".

When the pachinko gaming machine PY is turned on, the game control microcomputer 101 provided on the game control board 100 reads out and executes the game control main processing program shown in FIG. 33 from the game ROM 103. As shown in the figure, in the game control main process, first, the power-on process (S001) is performed. In the power-on processing, access permission setting to the game RAM 104, setting of the game CPU 102, SIO (System Input / Output), PIO (Parallel Input / Output), CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit: interrupt time management) Circuit) is set.

Following the power-on processing, interrupts are disabled (S002), and normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing (S003) is executed. In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S003), the counter values of various random numbers related to the normal symbol-related determination information and the special symbol-related determination information are added by 1 and updated. When the counter value of each random number reaches the upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of the counter of each random number may be a value other than "0" or may be changed at random. Further, at least a part of each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated by using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

When the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S003) is completed, an interrupt is permitted (S004). While the interrupt is enabled, the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) can be executed. The game control side timer interrupt process (S005) is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the game CPU 102, for example, at a cycle of 4 msec. That is, the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) is executed in a cycle of 4 msec. Then, between the end of the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) and the start of the next game control side timer interrupt process (S005), the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S003) is used. The process of updating the counter values of various random numbers is repeatedly executed. If an interrupt pulse is input to the game CPU 102 in the interrupt disabled state, the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S004). ..

[Game control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) will be described. As shown in FIG. 34, in the game control side timer interrupt process (S005), the output process (S101) is first executed. In the output process (S101), in each process described below, commands and the like set in the output buffer provided in the game RAM 104 of the game control board 100 are output to the effect control board 120, the payout control board 170, and the like.

In the input process (S102) performed after the output process (S101), the game control microcomputer 101 takes in the detection signal from the lower plate full switch that detects the fullness of the surplus ball storage hole 35A, and plays the game as the lower plate full data. Stored in the output buffer of the RAM 104.

The normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed next is the same as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S003) performed in the game control main process of FIG. 33. That is, the process of updating the counter values of various random numbers related to the normal figure-related determination information and the special figure-related determination information includes the execution period of the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) and the other period (main side timer interrupt process (main side timer interrupt process). After the end of S005), it is performed both in the period until the next game control side timer interrupt process (S005) is started).

Following the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103), the game control microcomputer 101 performs a sensor detection process (S104), then a normal operation process (S105), and further performs a special operation process (S106). conduct. The sensor detection process, normal operation process, and special operation process will be described later.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 executes other processing (S107), and ends the game control side timer interrupt processing (S005). Other processes (S107) include power failure monitoring processing when the power is turned off, updating the timer provided in the gaming RAM 104, and the like. Further, as another process (S107), a payout control process for paying out the prize ball to the player is performed. In the payout control process, the prize ball counter for the first starting port 11, the prize ball counter for the second starting port 12, the prize ball counter for the large winning opening 14, and the prize ball counter for the general winning opening 10 are " It is checked whether or not it exceeds "0", and if it exceeds "0", the prize ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control board 170. Then, when the prize ball signal is transmitted, the update process of subtracting "1" from the prize ball counter related to the signal is performed.

Then, the game control microcomputer 101 repeatedly executes the processes of the game control main processes S002 to S004 until the interrupt pulse is input to the game CPU 102, and when the interrupt pulse is input (after about 4 msec). ), The game control side timer interrupt process (S005) is executed again. The game control microcomputer 101 is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 in the previous game control side timer interrupt process (S005) in the output process (S101) of the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) executed again. Outputs the command etc.

[Sensor detection processing]
Next, the sensor detection process will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 36. In the sensor detection process (S104), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening 10, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the general winning opening sensor 10a (S201). If no game ball has won in the general winning opening 10 (NO in S201), the process proceeds to step S203, and if a game ball has won in the general winning opening 10 (YES in S201), a predetermined number of game balls have been entered. General prize-winning prize ball processing for paying out prize balls is performed (S202). In the general winning opening prize ball processing, the number of prize balls (“3” in the basic embodiment) corresponding to the winning of the general winning opening 10 is added to the prize ball counter for the general winning opening 10.

In step S203, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 13, that is, whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 13a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 13 (NO in S203), the process proceeds to step S207. On the other hand, if the game ball has passed through the gate 13 (YES in S203), whether or not the normal operation status described later is 1, in other words, whether or not the variable display of the normal figure or the auxiliary game is performed. It is determined whether or not (S204). If the normal operation status is not 1 (NO in S204), the process proceeds to step S207, and if the normal operation status = 1 (YES in S204), the counter value of the normal symbol random number counter (label-TRND-F). The normal symbol random number indicated by the above is acquired as the normal diagram-related determination information (S205), and the acquired normal symbol-related determination information is stored in the normal diagram holding storage unit 86 provided in the gaming RAM 104 (S206). Proceed to.

In step S207, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the second starting port 12, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the second starting port sensor 12a. If the game ball has not won a prize in the second starting port 12 (NO in S207), the process proceeds to step S214, and if the game ball has won a prize in the second starting port 12 (YES in S207), the game ball is designated. The second starting opening prize ball processing for paying out the number of prize balls is performed (S208). In the second starting port prize ball processing, the number of prize balls (“2” in the basic embodiment) corresponding to the winning of the second starting port 12 is added to the prize ball counter for the second starting port 12.

Next, when the special figure 2 hold number (specifically, the numerical value of the counter (special figure 2 hold number counter) for counting the special figure 2 hold number provided in the gaming RAM 104) is "4" (upper limit storage number) or more. It is determined whether or not there is (S209). If the number of special figure 2 hold is "4" or more (YES in S209), the process proceeds to step S214, but if the number of special figure 2 hold is not "4" or more (less than "4"), the process proceeds to step S214. NO in S209), special figure 2 holding number addition processing is performed (S210). In the special figure 2 hold number addition process, the special figure 2 hold number counter is added by "1", and the special figure 2 hold number indicated by the special figure 2 hold indicator 83b is increased by "1".

Subsequently, a special symbol random number counter (label-TRND-T), a jackpot symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-OS), a reach random number counter (label-TRND-RC), and a special symbol variation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-). The special figure 2 related determination information composed of HP) is acquired and stored in the special figure related determination information buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104 (S211).

Next, the second look-ahead determination process is performed (S212). In the second look-ahead determination process, the second start-up winning command is specified and specified by collating the current gaming state with the special figure 2 related determination information acquired in step S211 in the second look-ahead determination table shown in FIG. The second start winning command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the special figure 2 related determination information acquired in step S211 in the special figure 2 hold storage unit 105b (S213).

Subsequently, in step S214, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the first start port 11, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the first start port sensor 11a. If the game ball has not won a prize in the first starting port 11 (NO in S214), the process proceeds to step S221, and if the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 11 (YES in S214), the game ball is designated. The first starting opening prize ball processing for paying out the number of prize balls is performed (S215). In the first starting port prize ball processing, the number of prize balls (“4” in the basic embodiment) corresponding to the winning of the first starting port 11 is added to the prize ball counter for the first starting port 11.

Next, the number of special figure 1 hold (specifically, the numerical value of the counter for counting the number of special figure 1 hold provided in the gaming RAM 104 (special figure 1 hold number counter)) is "4" (upper limit storage number) or more. It is determined whether or not it is (S216). If the number of special figure 1 hold is "4" or more (YES in S216), the process proceeds to step S221, but if the number of special figure 1 hold is not (less than) "4" or more (NO in S216). ), The special figure 1 hold number addition process is performed (S217). In the special figure 1 hold number addition process, the special figure 1 hold number counter is added by "1", and the special figure 1 hold number indicated by the special figure 1 hold indicator 83a is increased by "1".

Subsequently, a special symbol random number counter (label-TRND-T), a jackpot symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-OS), a reach random number counter (label-TRND-RC), and a special symbol variation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-). The special figure 1 related determination information composed of HP) is acquired and stored in the special figure related determination information buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104 (S218).

Next, the first look-ahead determination process is performed (S219). In the first look-ahead determination process, the first start winning command is specified and specified by collating the current gaming state with the special figure 1 related determination information acquired in step S218 in the first look-ahead determination table shown in FIG. The first start winning command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the special figure 1 related determination information acquired in step S218 in the storage area of the special figure 1 hold storage unit 105a according to the current number of special figure 1 hold (S220).

In step S221, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening 14, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the large winning opening sensor 14a. If the game ball has not won in the large winning opening 14 (NO in S221), the sensor detection process is terminated, and if the game ball has won in the large winning opening 14 (YES in S221), the gaming RAM 104 is entered. It is determined whether or not the counter value of the provided large winning opening winning counter is "9" or more (S222). The big winning opening winning counter is a counter for counting the number of winnings in the big winning opening 14 in one round game of the big hit game. In addition, the big winning opening winning counter is cleared every time each round game is completed. In the first embodiment, the winning rule number is set to "14". Therefore, the process of step S222 is performed.

When the counter value of the big prize opening winning counter is "11" or more (YES in S222), the sensor detection process is terminated and the counter value of the big winning opening winning counter is not "11" or more, that is, less than "11". If (NO in S222), the counter value of the large prize opening prize counter is added by "1" (S223), and the large winning opening prize ball processing for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls to the player is performed (S224). ), End the sensor detection process. In the large prize opening prize ball processing, the number of prize balls (“9” in the basic embodiment) corresponding to the winning of the large winning opening 14 is added to the prize ball counter for the large winning opening 14.

As a sensor capable of detecting the game ball, a sensor other than the sensors 10a to 14a is provided, and based on the sensor detecting the game ball, processing other than the processing shown in FIGS. 35 to 36 is performed. Is also good.

[Normal operation processing]
Next, a normal operation process relating to the control of the normal figure display 82 and the electric chew 12D will be described. As shown in FIG. 37, the processing related to the normal figure display 82 and the electric chew 12D is divided into four statuses (stages). Then, "normal operation status = 1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each of these statuses. The game control microcomputer 101 first confirms the "normal operation status" in the normal operation process (S105) (S1101). When the "normal operation status" is "1", the normal symbol standby process (S1102) is performed, and when the "normal operation status" is "2", the normal symbol variation process (S1103) is performed. When the "normal operation status" is "3", the normal symbol determination process (S1104) is performed, and when the "normal operation status" is "4", the auxiliary game control process (S1105) is performed. The "normal operation status" is set to "1" by default.

The normal symbol standby process (S1102) is a process performed during standby in which the variable display of the normal map and the auxiliary game are not performed. In the normal symbol standby process (S1102), a hit determination is performed based on the normal symbol random number stored in the normal symbol hold storage unit 86. Further, the normal map fluctuation pattern is determined based on the current gaming state, and the normal map fluctuation pattern is determined, and the normal map fluctuation display of the normal map fluctuation time according to the determined normal map fluctuation pattern is displayed on the normal map display 82. And change the normal operation status to "2". Further, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the normal map fluctuation start command according to the normal map fluctuation pattern determination result in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 at the start of the normal map variation display.

The normal symbol variation process (S1103) is a process performed when the normal symbol is variablely displayed. In the normal symbol variation processing (S1103), it is determined whether or not the normal map fluctuation time has elapsed since the execution of the normal map variation display started (whether or not the normal map variation display is terminated), and the normal symbol variation processing is performed. If it is determined that the figure fluctuation time has elapsed, the stop display of the normal figure is performed based on the hit determination result, and the normal operation status is changed to "3". Further, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the normal map fluctuation stop command in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 at the start of the normal map fluctuation display.

The normal symbol determination process (S1104) is a process performed when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. In the normal symbol confirmation process (S1104), whether or not a predetermined stop time (for example, 0.8 seconds) has elapsed since the stop display of the running normal figure started (whether to end the stop display of the normal figure). Whether or not) is determined, and if it is determined that the predetermined stop time has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the normal figure displayed as stopped is a winning symbol. If it is not a winning symbol (if the stopped symbol is a lost symbol), the normal operation status is changed to "1". On the other hand, if the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the normal operation status is changed to "4", and the auxiliary game is started based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table. Further, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the auxiliary game start command in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 at the start of the auxiliary game.

The auxiliary game control process (S1105) is a process performed when the auxiliary game is being performed. In the auxiliary game control process (S1105), the auxiliary game is controlled based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table. Then, when the auxiliary game is completed, the normal operation status is changed to "1".

[Special operation processing]
Next, a special operation process relating to the control of the special figure display 81, the special figure hold display 83, and the grand prize device 14D will be described. As shown in FIG. 38, the processing related to the special figure display 81, the special figure hold display 83, and the grand prize device 14D is divided into five statuses (stages). Then, "special operation status = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each of these statuses. The game control microcomputer 101 first confirms the "special operation status" (S1501).

The game control microcomputer 101 performs special symbol standby processing (S1502) when the "special operation status" is "1", and changes the special symbol when the "special operation status" is "2". The process (S1503) is performed, and when the "special operation status" is "3", the special symbol determination process (S1504) is performed, and when the "special operation status" is "4", the jackpot game control The process (S1505) is performed, and when the "special operation status" is "5", the game state setting process (S1506) is performed. The "special operation status" is set to "1" by default.

The special symbol standby process (S1502) is a process performed during standby in which the variable display of the special symbol and the jackpot game are not performed. The special symbol standby process will be described in detail later.

The special symbol variation process (S1503) is a process performed when the special symbol is variablely displayed. The special symbol variation processing will be described in detail later.

The special symbol determination process (S1504) is a process performed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. The special symbol determination process will be described in detail later.

The jackpot game control process (S1505) is a process performed in the jackpot game. The game control microcomputer 101 performs the jackpot game control process to perform the jackpot game according to the jackpot game control table. When the jackpot game ends, the special action status is changed to "5". When each round game is started, a round number designation command indicating the number of rounds is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104. Further, when all the round games are completed and the ending is started, an ending command indicating the ending corresponding to the jackpot symbol related to the jackpot game is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104. It should be noted that the state in which the game control microcomputer 101 sets the special operation status "4" and controls the big hit game is the "big hit game state", and the special operation status "4" is set as the "big hit". It is called "game state".

The game state setting process (S1506) is a process of setting a game state to be controlled after the big hit game when the big hit game ends. For example, when controlling in a high probability state after a big hit game, the high probability flag is turned ON in the high probability flag area of the game RAM 104 to set the high probability state. Further, at this time, when limiting the duration of the high probability state, the duration is also set. For example, when the end condition of the high probability state is the number of executions of the special figure variable display, the number of times (hereinafter referred to as "high probability specified number of times") is set in the high probability remaining number counter provided in the gaming RAM 104. .. Further, when controlling in the time saving state after the big hit game, the time saving flag is turned ON in the time saving flag area of the game RAM 104 to set the time saving state. Further, at this time, if the duration of the time saving state is limited, the duration is also set. For example, when the end condition of the time saving state is the number of executions of the special figure variable display, the number of times (hereinafter referred to as "time saving specified number of times") is set in the time saving remaining number counter provided in the game RAM 104.

Further, in the game state setting process, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a game state command indicating the game state after the big hit game in the output buffer of the game RAM 104.

[Special symbol standby processing]
Next, the special symbol standby process will be described with reference to FIG. 39. In the special symbol standby process (S1502), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved special figures 2 is "0" (S1601). When the number of reserved special figures 2 is "0" (YES in S1601), that is, when there is no memory of the special figure 2 related determination information acquired due to the winning of the second starting port 12, the special figure 2 is a special figure. 1 It is determined whether or not the number of reservations is "0" (S1608). Then, when the number of reserved special figures 1 is also "0" (YES in S1608), that is, when there is no memory of the special figure 1 related determination information acquired due to the winning of the first starting port 11. It is determined whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON (S1618). Here, if the customer wait flag is ON (YES in S1618), the special symbol wait process is completed, and if the customer wait flag is not ON (NO in S1618), the customer wait command is set in the output buffer (S1619). , The customer waiting flag is turned ON (S1620), and the special symbol waiting process is completed.

Further, when the special figure 2 hold number is "0" but the special figure 1 hold number is not "0" (YES in S1601 and NO in S1608), that is, there is no special figure 2 related determination information, but the first start. When there is one or more stores of the special figure 1 related determination information acquired due to the winning of the mouth 11, the special figure 1 determination process (S1609) and the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process (S1610) are performed.

In the special figure 1 determination process (S1609), among the special symbol random numbers stored in the special figure 1 hold storage unit 105a, the earliest stored one is read out and based on the jackpot determination table associated with the game state. Then, it is determined whether it is a big hit or a loss (big hit judgment).

Here, if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the jackpot symbol type random number is read out and the jackpot symbol type is determined based on the first jackpot symbol type determination table (big hit symbol type determination). Then, the jackpot symbol data representing the jackpot symbol type is set in the special symbol buffer provided in the game RAM 104, and the symbol designation command representing the jackpot symbol type is set in the output buffer provided in the game RAM 104.

If the result of the jackpot determination is "loss", the loss symbol data representing the loss is set in the special symbol buffer, and the symbol designation command indicating the loss is set in the output buffer.

Next, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process (S1610) will be described with reference to FIG. 40. In the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the state is currently in a non-time saving state (S1651). If it is in the non-time saving state (YES in S1651), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state is selected (S1652), and then the process proceeds to step S1654. After selecting the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for the state (S1653), the process proceeds to step S1654.

In step S1654, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the jackpot determination result is "big hit". If it is not a big hit (NO in S1654), the process proceeds to step S1655, and if it is a big hit (YES in S1654), it is for the big hit symbol from the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653. After selecting the variation pattern determination table in Special Figure 1 (S1659), the process proceeds to step S1660.

In step S1655, the game control microcomputer 101 makes a reach determination. In the reach determination, the reach random number is read out, and the reach random number is collated with the reach determination table according to the current gaming state (non-time saving state / time saving state) to determine whether or not there is reach.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the result of the reach determination in step S1655 is “with reach” (S1656). If there is reach (YES in S1656), the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for loss with reach is selected from the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653 (S1658). Then, the process proceeds to step S1660, and if there is no reach (NO in S1656), the current number of special figure 1 holdes is confirmed, and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653 is used. Select (S1657) the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for loss without reach according to the number of reserved special figures 1 and then proceed to step S1660.

In step S1660, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out the special figure fluctuation pattern random number and collates the special figure fluctuation pattern random number with the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table selected in any of steps S1657 to S1569. Special Figure 1 Judgment of fluctuation pattern Special Figure 1 Judgment of fluctuation pattern is performed. Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the special figure 1 fluctuation start command indicating the determined special figure 1 fluctuation pattern in the output buffer (S1661), and the special figure fluctuation according to the determined special figure 1 fluctuation pattern. The time is set in the special operation timer (S1662), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination process is terminated, and the process is returned to the special symbol standby process.

The special operation timer is updated by 4 ms in other processes in the game control side timer interrupt process. In addition, the set special figure 1 fluctuation start command includes information on the type of special symbol (that is, special figure 1) and the special figure fluctuation pattern determination performed in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination process (S1610). Information on the result (information on the special map fluctuation pattern including information on the presence or absence of reach and the special map fluctuation time) is included.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 causes the special figure 1 display 81a to start the variation display of the special figure 1 based on the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determined in step S1610 (S1611). ..

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 shifts the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 1 hold storage unit 105a to the side to be read from the current position, and the special figure 1 hold storage unit 105a. The storage area corresponding to the first hold storage area (the storage area farthest from the read side) is cleared in the special figure 1 hold storage unit shift process (S1612). In this way, the special figure 1 hold is digested in the order in which it was held.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 subtracts "1" from the special figure 1 hold number counter (S1613), and reduces and changes the special figure 1 hold number indicated by the special figure 1 hold display 83a by "1" (S1613). S1614), the special operation status is changed to "2" (S1615).

The game control microcomputer 101 subsequently determines whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON (S1616), if it is ON (YES in S1616), turns off the customer waiting flag (S1617), and performs a special symbol standby process. If it is not ON (NO in S1616), the special symbol standby process is completed without executing step S1617.

Further, when the special figure 2 hold number is not "0" in step S1601 (NO in S1601), that is, one or more of the special figure 2 related determination information acquired due to the winning of the second starting port 12 is stored. If there is, the special figure 2 determination process (S1602) and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process (S1603) are performed. The special figure 2 determination process (S1602) and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination process (S1603) are basically the same as the special figure 1 determination process (S1609) and the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process (S1610). ..

The special figure 2 determination process (S1602) is basically performed except that the table used for the jackpot determination is the second jackpot determination table and the table used for the jackpot symbol type determination is the second jackpot symbol type determination table. Since the process is the same as that of the special figure 1 determination process (S1609), the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination process (S1603) is also basically a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination process (S1603) except that the table used in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination is the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table. Since the process is the same as S1610), the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 causes the special figure 2 display 81b to start the change display of the special figure 2 based on the special figure change time corresponding to the special figure change pattern determined in step S1603 (S1604).

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 shifts the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 2 hold storage unit 105b to the side to be read from the current position, and the special figure 2 hold storage unit 105b. The storage area corresponding to the fourth hold storage area (the storage area farthest from the read side) is cleared in the special figure 2 hold storage unit shift process (S1605). In this way, the special figure 2 hold is digested in the order in which it was held.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 subtracts "1" from the special figure 2 hold number counter (S1606), and reduces and changes the special figure 2 hold number indicated by the special figure 2 hold display 83b by "1" (S1607). ), The special operation status is changed to "2" (S1615), and the process proceeds to step S1616.

As described above, in the basic embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the special figure 1 hold is performed only when the special figure 2 hold is "0" (YES in S1601). That is, the digestion of the special figure 2 hold is executed in preference to the digestion of the special figure 1 hold. Further, in the basic embodiment, the lottery based on the special figure 2 hold is easier to win the jackpot symbol that is more profitable for the player than the lottery based on the special figure 1 hold. It should be noted that the digestion of the special figure 1 hold may be executed in preference to the digestion of the special figure 2 hold. Further, the digestion of the special figure 1 hold and the digestion of the special figure 2 hold may be performed in the order in which the hold occurs regardless of the type of the special figure.

[Special symbol change processing]
Next, the special symbol variation processing will be described with reference to FIG. 41. In the special symbol variation processing, the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not to end the variation display of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol variation time set in the special operation timer in step S1603 or step S1610 has elapsed (special). It is determined whether or not the operation counter = 0) (S1701). When the variation display of the special symbol is not terminated (NO in S1701), when the variation processing of the special symbol is terminated and the variation display of the special symbol is terminated (YES in S1701), the variation display of the special symbol is displayed on the special symbol display 81. Is terminated, and the stop display of the special symbol according to the symbol data (big hit symbol data or lost special symbol data) set in the special symbol buffer in step S1602 or step S1609 is displayed (S1702).

Subsequently, a preset special figure confirmation time (for example, 0.8 seconds) is set in the special operation timer (S1703), and a special figure change stop command indicating that the change display of the special symbol ends is output as an output buffer. (S1704), the special operation status is changed to "3" (S1705), and the special symbol change processing is terminated.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
Next, the special symbol determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 42. In the special symbol determination process (S1504), the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not to end the stop display of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol determination time set in the special operation timer in step S1703 has elapsed (special). It is determined whether or not the operation counter = 0) (S1751). When the stop display of the special symbol is not terminated (NO in S1751), when the stop display of the special symbol is terminated by ending the special symbol confirmation process (YES in S1751), the normal probability state (high probability flag is OFF) is currently present. It is determined whether or not it is (S1752).

If the game control microcomputer 101 is not currently in the normal probability state (NO in S1752), the process proceeds to step S1757, and if it is currently in the normal probability state (YES in S1752), the game control microcomputer 101 is in the time saving state (time saving flag is ON). Whether or not it is determined (S1753). If the game control microcomputer 101 is not in the time saving state (NO in S1753), the process proceeds to step S1757, and if it is currently in the time saving state (YES in S1753), the rest of the variable display of the special symbol that can be executed in the time saving state. The value of the time saving remaining number counter for measuring the number of times (time saving remaining number) is subtracted by "1" (S1754), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving remaining number counter is "0" (S1755). If the value of the time reduction remaining number counter (number of time reduction remaining) is not "0" (NO in S1755), the process proceeds to step S1757, and if the value of the time saving remaining number counter (time reduction remaining number) is "0" (in S1755). YES), the state is changed from the time saving state to the non-time saving state (the time saving flag is turned off) (S1756), and the process proceeds to step S1757.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 confirms the current game state, sets a game state command indicating the game state in the output buffer (S1757), and whether or not the special symbol currently stopped and displayed is a jackpot symbol. Is determined (S1758). If it is not a jackpot symbol (NO in S1758), the special operation status is changed to "1" (S1762), the special symbol confirmation process is completed, and if it is a jackpot symbol (YES in S1758), the game state is reset (YES). The normal game state is set. Specifically, the high probability flag and the time saving flag are turned off, and the values of the high probability remaining number counter and the time saving remaining number counter are set to "0") (S1759).

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 performs a jackpot game preparation process (S1760), changes the special operation status to "4" (S1761), and ends the special symbol determination process. In the jackpot game preparation process, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a jackpot game control table according to the type of the jackpot symbol in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104. In addition, the jackpot opening flag indicating that the opening according to the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed is turned on in the predetermined area of the game RAM 104, and the predetermined opening time (the jackpot game starts) according to the type of the jackpot symbol. (Time from being done to starting one round) is set in the special operation timer. Further, an opening command indicating the type of the jackpot symbol is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 according to the type of the jackpot symbol. The opening command according to the type of the jackpot symbol indicates that the jackpot game (opening of the jackpot game) corresponding to the type of the jackpot symbol that has been stopped and displayed is started.

6. Control of staging by staging control board 120 [Staging control main processing]
Next, the control of the staging by the staging control board 120 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 43 to 47. The flowchart for controlling the effect described below is an example. Then, the plurality of processes in the flowchart can be appropriately changed in the execution order or executed in parallel as long as the processing contents do not conflict with each other.

Further, the counter, timer, flag, buffer and the like appearing in the following description of the control of the effect by the effect control board 120 are provided in the effect RAM 124. When the pachinko gaming machine PY is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 121 provided on the effect control board 120 reads out the program of the sub-control main process shown in FIG. 43 from the effect ROM 123 and executes it.

As shown in the figure, in the staging control main process, first, the power-on process is performed according to the power-on (S4001). In the power-on processing, for example, the effect CPU 122 is set, and SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time) and the like are set.

Next, the interrupt is disabled (S4002) and the random number seed update process is executed (S4003). In the random number seed update process (S4003), the values of various effect determination random number counters for making determinations related to various effects are updated. The random numbers for determining the effect include various random numbers for determining the content of the effect, such as a random number for determining a stop symbol pattern and a random number for determining a special figure variation effect pattern, which will be described later.

As an example, the method for updating the random number counter for determination for various effects can be the same as the random number update process performed by the game control board 100 described above. Instead of adding the random values by 1 at the time of updating, it may be added by 2 or the like. This also applies to the random number update process performed by the game control board 100 described above.

When the random number seed update process is completed, the command transmission process is executed (S4004). In the command transmission process, various commands stored in the output buffer in the effect RAM 124 of the effect control board 120 (for example, a special figure variation effect start command, a customer waiting start command, an opening effect start command, and a round effect start, which will be described later). A command, an ending effect start command, etc.) are transmitted to the image control board 140.

The image control board 140 that has received the command displays an image on the display unit 50a according to the received command (executes various effects by the image). Further, the staging control board 120 can output sound from the speaker 52 via the voice control circuit 161 (execute various staging by voice), and the sub drive board, together with various staging performed by the image control board 140. The frame lamp 53 is made to emit light via 162 (various effects are executed by the light emission), and the board movable body 55k is operated (various effects are executed by the operation). The various effects include a special figure variation effect, a jackpot game effect (big hit opening effect, round effect, big hit ending effect), a customer waiting effect, an operation effect, a look-ahead effect, and the like.

The staging control microcomputer 121 subsequently enables interrupts (S4005). After that, steps S4002 to S4005 are looped. While the interrupt is enabled, the receive interrupt process (S4010), the 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4011), and the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4012) can be executed. The 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4011) and the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4012) will be described later.

The reception interrupt process (S4010) is executed every time a strobe signal, that is, various commands sent from the game control board 100 are input to the external INT input unit of the effect control microcomputer 121. In the reception interrupt processing (S4010), the effect control microcomputer 121 stores various commands transmitted and received by the output process (S101) of the game control board 100 in the reception buffer of the effect RAM 124. This receive interrupt process is executed in preference to other interrupt processes (S4011, S4012).

[1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 1 ms timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 44. The 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4011) is executed every time an interrupt pulse having a cycle of 1 msec is input to the effect control board 120. The effect control microcomputer 121 first performs an input process (S4101) in the 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4011). In the input process, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates the first effect button switch data based on the detection signal from the first effect button sensor 40a. The effect control microcomputer 121 creates the second effect button switch data based on the detection signal from the second effect button sensor 41a.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs light emission data output processing (S4102). In the light emission data output process, the effect control microcomputer 121 emits light emission data created by the light emission data creation process (S4203) in the 10 ms timer interrupt process described later in order to cause the frame lamp 53 to emit light at a timing that matches the effect of the image. Is output to the sub drive board 162. That is, the effect control microcomputer 121 causes the frame lamp 53 to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode according to the light emission data.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs a movable device control process (S4103). In the movable device control process, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates or outputs drive data (data for driving the board movable body 55k) in order to drive the board movable body 55k at a predetermined timing. That is, the effect control microcomputer 121 drives the board movable body 55k in a predetermined operation mode according to the drive data.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs a timer update process (S4104). In the timer update process, various timers provided in the effect RAM 124, which will be described later, are updated in order to manage and control the time related to various predetermined effects. In this process, the timer provided in the effect RAM 124 is updated by 1 msec.

Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs a watchdog timer process for resetting the watchdog timer (S4105), and ends the 1 ms timer interrupt process.

[10ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 10 ms timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 45. The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4012) is executed every time an interrupt pulse having a cycle of 10 msec is input to the effect control board 120. In the 10 ms timer interrupt process, the effect control microcomputer 121 first performs a receive command analysis process for analyzing a command or the like stored in the receive buffer in step S4010 (S4201). The received command analysis process will be described in detail in the basic embodiment described later.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs voice control processing (S4202). In the voice control process, the creation of voice data (data for controlling the output of voice from the speaker 52) and the voice control circuit 161 are performed based on the effect content indicated by the special figure variation effect data set in the effect RAM 124. Is output.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs a light emission data creation process (S4203). In the light emission data creation process, light emission data is created based on the effect content or the like indicated by the special figure variation effect data set in the effect RAM 124.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis process will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 47. In the reception command analysis process, the effect control microcomputer 121 first receives a start winning command (first start winning command or second starting winning command) from the game control board 100, in other words, receiving the starting winning command. It is determined whether or not it is stored in the buffer (S4301). If the effect control microcomputer 121 has received the start winning command (YES in S4301), the process proceeds to step S4302, while if the start winning command has not been received (NO in S4301), the process proceeds to step S4303.

In step S4302, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs a start winning process according to the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12. In the start winning process, the received start winning command is stored in the start winning command hold storage unit 125 in the effect RAM 124. Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the stored start winning command and determines whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect indicating the jackpot expectation degree. The look-ahead effect includes a hold notice that displays the hold icon in a special mode, a continuous notice effect that is performed over a plurality of consecutive variable displays of the special symbol, and the like. When it is decided to execute these look-ahead effects, a look-ahead effect start command for executing the determined effect is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124.

When the pre-reading effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 receives a predetermined effect from the image ROM 142. The image is read out, and the display unit 50a of the image display device 50 performs a look-ahead effect using the image. Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 controls voice according to the pre-reading effect content indicated by the pre-reading effect start command transmitted to the image control board 140 while the pre-reading effect by the image performed by the image control board 140 is being performed. An image is output from the speaker 52 via the circuit 161 (a look-ahead effect is executed by the sound), and a frame lamp 53 is made to emit light via a sub drive board 162 (a look-ahead effect is executed by the light emission). It is possible to operate 55k (perform a look-ahead effect by the operation).

In step S4303, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the symbol designation command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the symbol designation command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the effect control microcomputer 121 has not received the symbol specification command (NO in S4303), the process proceeds to step S4305, while if the effect control microcomputer 121 has received the symbol specification command (YES in S4303), the effect control command is issued to the effect RAM 124. It is stored in the symbol designation command storage unit 126 in (S4304).

In step S4305, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the special figure change start command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the special figure change start command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the special figure change start command has not been received (NO in S4305), the process proceeds to step S4307, while if the special figure change start command has been received (YES in S4305), the effect content of the special figure change effect is determined. , The special figure variation effect start process (S4306) for starting the special figure variation effect is performed.

In the special figure variation effect start process, the effect control microcomputer 121 first stores the special figure variation start command in the special figure variation start command storage unit 127 in the effect RAM 124. Next, the effect symbol EZ1 to be stopped and displayed based on the content of the stop special symbol (type of jackpot symbol, lost special symbol) indicated by the symbol designation command already stored in step S4304 and the special symbol variation pattern indicated by the special symbol variation start command. -EZ3 and the stop symbol pattern determination table for determining the stop symbol for determining the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are selected. A plurality of stop symbol pattern determination tables are provided in association with the special figure and the special figure fluctuation pattern. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects one stop symbol pattern determination table associated with the stop special figure and the special figure fluctuation pattern. In each stop symbol pattern determination table, a random number value for stop symbol pattern determination (stop symbol pattern determination) is set for a plurality of effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 so as to have a predetermined distribution rate (%). Value) is distributed. Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the stop symbol pattern determination random number counter as a stop symbol pattern determination random number, and performs stop symbol pattern determination based on the acquired stop symbol pattern determination random number.

In the stop symbol pattern determination, the effect control microcomputer 121 collates the acquired stop symbol pattern determination random numbers with the selected stop symbol pattern table, and determines the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 to be stopped and displayed. Then, the data representing the determined effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are set in the predetermined area of the effect RAM 124. For example, if the special symbol variation pattern is a loss variation without reach, a combination of the staging symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is selected so as to have a so-called “separate stitch”. If the special symbol variation pattern is a loss variation with reach, the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 are the same, and the middle effect symbol EZ2 is different from them. The combination of KZ3 is selected. Further, if the special symbol variation pattern is a jackpot variation, a combination of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is selected so as to have so-called "doublets" according to the effect mode and the type of the jackpot symbol. ..

Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates a special figure variation effect pattern in which the effect content of the special figure variation effect is associated with the effect mode in which the effect is staying and the special figure variation pattern indicated by the special figure variation start command. Select the special figure variation effect pattern determination table for determining the special figure variation effect pattern to be determined. A plurality of special figure variation effect pattern determination tables are provided in association with the effect mode and the special figure variation pattern. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects one special figure variation effect pattern determination table associated with the special figure variation pattern. In each special figure variation effect pattern determination table, one or a plurality of special figure variation effect pattern has a random number value for determining the special figure variation effect pattern (special figure variation effect pattern) so as to have a predetermined distribution rate (%). Judgment value) is distributed. Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the random number counter for determining the special figure variation effect pattern as a random number for determining the special figure variation effect pattern, and the special figure is based on the acquired random number for determining the special figure variation effect pattern. The variation effect pattern is judged.

The effect control microcomputer 121 collates the acquired special figure variation effect pattern determination random number with the selected special figure variation effect pattern table in the special figure variation effect pattern determination, and determines and determines the special figure variation effect pattern. The data representing the special figure variation effect pattern (special figure variation effect pattern data) is set in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124, and the special figure variation effect start command indicating the special figure variation effect pattern is sent to the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. set.

When the special figure variation effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 is predetermined from the image ROM 142. The effect image of the above is read out, and the special figure variation effect is performed by the image on the display unit 50a of the image display device 50.

In addition, the special map variation effect start command includes information about the effect flow associated with the special map variation pattern indicated by the special map variation start command. Further, in addition to the special figure variation effect by the image performed by the image display device 50, the special figure variation effect start command includes the special figure variation effect by the voice output from the speaker 52 and the special figure variation effect by the light emission performed by the frame lamp 53. The effect content of the figure variation effect and the effect content of the special figure variation effect by the operation performed by the movable board 55k are included.

Further, in the effect control microcomputer 121, while the special figure variation effect by the image performed by the image control board 140 is being performed, the special figure variation effect content indicated by the special figure variation effect start command transmitted to the image control board 140. In response to this, the speaker 52 outputs the sound via the voice control circuit 161 (executes the special figure variation effect by the voice), and the frame lamp 53 emits light via the sub drive board 162 (the special figure by the light emission). (Execute the variation effect) and operate the board movable body 55k (execute the special figure variation effect by the operation).

In step S4307, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the special figure fluctuation stop command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the special figure fluctuation stop command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the staging control microcomputer 121 has not received the special figure fluctuation stop command (NO in S4307), it proceeds to step S4309, while if it has received the special figure fluctuation stop command (YES in S4307), the special figure change. A special symbol variation effect end process (S4308) is performed to end the effect (stop the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 and perform the stop display).

The staging control microcomputer 121 analyzes the special figure fluctuation stop command in the special figure fluctuation effect end process, and appropriately ends the special figure variation effect based on the analysis result (effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, and small symbol KZ1). A special figure variation effect end command for stopping the variation display of KZ3 is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. When the image control board 140 receives the command to end the special symbol variation effect, the image control board 140 ends the special symbol variation effect being executed (stops the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 being changed).

In step S4309, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the game state command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the game state command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the effect control microcomputer 121 has not received the game state command (NO in S4309), the process proceeds to step S4311, while if the game state command has been received (YES in S4309), the effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the game state command. , The game state represented by the game state command is specified, and the game state setting process for setting the game state is performed (S4310).

In the game state setting process, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets a game state flag corresponding to the game state indicated by the game state command in the game state flag area of the effect RAM 124. For example, if the game state indicated by the game state command is the normal game state, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the game state flag “00H” in the game state flag area of the effect RAM 124. Further, if the game state indicated by the game state command is a high-probability high-base game state, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the game state flag “01H” in the game state flag area of the effect RAM 124. Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the game state flag "02H" in the game state flag area of the effect RAM 124 if the game state indicated by the game state command is a low-probability high-base game state.

In step S4311, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the customer waiting command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the customer waiting command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the effect control microcomputer 121 has not received the customer waiting command (NO in S4311), the process proceeds to step S4313, while if the effect waiting command has been received (YES in S4311), the effect waiting effect waiting process is performed. (S4312), the received command analysis process is completed.

In the customer waiting effect standby process, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the waiting time (customer waiting effect waiting time:, for example, 20 seconds) from the stop display of the effect symbol to the start of the customer waiting effect. Set in the timer. The staging control microcomputer 121 can determine whether or not the waiting time has elapsed, and when it is determined that the waiting time has elapsed, the staging RAM 124 issues a customer waiting effect start command for starting the customer waiting effect. Set in the output buffer of.

In step S4313, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the opening command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the opening command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the staging control microcomputer 121 has not received the opening command (NO in S4313), it proceeds to step S4315, while if it has received the opening command (YES in S4313), the jackpot game accompanies the start of the jackpot game. The opening staging start process is performed (S4314).

The effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the opening command in the jackpot opening effect start process, and determines whether or not to execute the jackpot opening effect according to the opening of the jackpot game to be executed from now on based on the analysis result. If you want to execute it, select the effect content of the jackpot opening effect (big hit opening effect pattern), and output the jackpot opening effect start command to start the jackpot opening effect with the selected jackpot opening effect pattern of the effect RAM 124. Set in the buffer.

In step S4315, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the game control board 100 has received the round number designation command, in other words, whether or not the round number designation command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the round number designation command has not been received (NO in S4315), the process proceeds to step S4317, while if the round number designation command has been received (YES in S4315), the round effect start process accompanying the start of the round game is performed. (S4316).

The staging control microcomputer 121 analyzes the round number designation command in the round staging start process, determines whether or not to execute the round staging according to the round game to be started, and if so, the round staging. The effect content (round effect pattern) of is selected, and the round effect start command corresponding to the selected round effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124.

In step S4317, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the ending command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the ending command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the ending command has not been received (NO in S4317), the received command analysis process is completed, while if the ending command has been received (YES in S4317), the jackpot ending effect start process associated with the start of the ending of the jackpot game (NO). After performing S4318) and the effect mode setting process (S4319), the received command analysis process is completed.

The effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the ending command in the jackpot ending effect start process, determines whether or not to execute the jackpot ending effect according to the ending of the jackpot game to be executed, and if it is executed. The effect content of the jackpot ending effect (big hit ending effect pattern) is selected, and the jackpot ending effect start command corresponding to the selected jackpot ending effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the effect mode after the jackpot game based on the analysis result of the ending command, specifically, the jackpot symbol indicated by the ending command in the effect mode setting process (effect mode). Process to control).

For example, if the jackpot symbol indicated by the jackpot ending command is the jackpot symbol A or the jackpot symbol D, the effect control microcomputer 121 is set to the probability variation effect mode suggesting a high probability and high base game state. Then, the effect mode flag indicating the probability change effect mode is turned on in the predetermined area of the effect RAM 124, and the probability change effect mode start command indicating that the probability change effect mode is set is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. When the probability variation effect mode start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 is at the timing when the ending is completed. , The probability variation background image G120 is displayed as the background image, and the probability variation BGM is output as the BGM.

Further, in the staging control microcomputer 121, if the jackpot symbol indicated by the jackpot ending command is the jackpot symbol B, the jackpot symbol C, or the jackpot symbol E, either the high-probability high-base gaming state or the low-probability high-base gaming state. Set the time saving effect mode that is difficult or impossible to determine. Then, the staging control microcomputer 121 turns on the staging mode flag indicating the staging mode in a predetermined area of the staging RAM 124, and issues a time saving mode start command indicating that the staging mode is set to the output buffer of the staging RAM 124. Set to. When the time saving effect mode start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 is at the timing when the ending is completed. , The time-saving background image G130 is displayed as the background image, and the time-saving BGM is output as the BGM.

<First Embodiment>
Next, a first embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the above-mentioned basic embodiment according to the present invention. In the following, mainly, as the first embodiment, points different from the basic embodiment will be described. Further, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those of the basic embodiments or the corresponding configurations.

In the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment, a predetermined number (for example, 10,000) of gaming balls, which are gaming media, are enclosed inside and circulate inside without being discharged to the outside. It consists of an enclosed gaming machine that cannot touch the gaming ball. In the pachinko gaming machine PY1, regardless of whether the player has won (passed through) various winning openings 10, 11, 12, or 14 that can obtain a gaming ball as a winning ball, or has passed through the out opening 19 without winning. The game balls that are fired, enter the game area 6 and flow down in the game area 6 are collected, and by re-launching the collected game balls, the game is performed by cyclically using the internal game balls. ..

In the following, a game ball that wins (passes through) various winning openings 10, 11, 12, and 14 and is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 is referred to as a "safe ball" and is not won. A game ball that passes through the out port 19 and is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 may be referred to as an “out ball”. Furthermore, the safe ball and the out ball may be collectively referred to as a "discharge ball".

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1, the gaming ball is set (supplied) at a predetermined firing position and then launched toward the gaming area 6 by the launching device 72. It may return to the specified launch position without reaching. In this case, the game ball returning toward the predetermined launch position is not returned to the predetermined launch position as it is, but is collected as a foul ball from the predetermined foul ball collection port formed in the launch region 7. Then, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1, the foul ball is also fired again after being collected, like the sail ball and the out ball (discharge ball). That is, the safe ball, the out ball, and the foul ball constitute a game ball that is cyclically used inside the pachinko gaming machine PY1.

Further, in the first embodiment, all the gaming balls enclosed in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 are stainless steel gaming balls that do not stick to the magnet. This stainless steel game ball has a lower iron content than a steel game ball that sticks to a magnet that is generally used in the past. This is to prevent fraud in guiding the game ball with a magnet from the outside of the transparent plate 23t.

FIG. 48 is a front view schematically showing the pachinko gaming machine PY1. As shown in FIG. 48, a card unit CU is installed on the left side of the pachinko gaming machine PY1. The front of the card unit CU is provided with a card insertion slot CUa1 into which an IC card serving as a recording medium can be inserted and removed, and a bill insertion slot CUa2 into which bills can be inserted. The card unit CU reads and rewrites valuable information such as the credit balance and the number of balls held by the IC card for the IC card inserted in the card insertion slot CUa1, and bidirectionally with the pachinko gaming machine PY1. It is possible to communicate with.

Further, since the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is composed of an enclosed gaming machine, the structure of the front door 23 is significantly different from that of the basic embodiment.

At the lower end of the front of the front door 23, a unit display device 300 capable of performing an operation for starting a game is arranged. The unit display device 300 comprises a touch panel having a liquid crystal display, and displays a button (rental button) for renting a game ball (not shown) and a button (return button) for returning the game ball.

The unit display device 300 is electrically connected to the card unit CU. When the lending button or the return button displayed on the unit display device 300 is operated, the card unit CU transmits to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 that the gaming ball is rented or returned.

Further, a projecting base 34 projecting forward is provided directly above the unit display device 300 in the front door 23. Since the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is an enclosed gaming machine, the protruding table 34 is not opened like the upper plate 34 of the pachinko gaming machine PY according to the basic embodiment, but is hermetically sealed. Has a structure that does not allow contact with the game ball. Further, a ball holding number display device 301 for displaying the number of balls held, which will be described later, is arranged on the front surface of the protruding table 34, and a pressing operation is possible on the upper surface of the protruding table 34 as in the basic embodiment. The first effect button 40k is arranged.

The second effect button 41k (second effect button device 41) mounted on the pachinko gaming machine PY of the basic embodiment is not mounted on the pachinko game machine PY1. Further, the front door 23 is provided with a speaker 52 and a frame lamp 53 having a configuration different from that of the basic embodiment. The frame lamp 53 includes an upper frame lamp 53U arranged on the upper side and a lower frame lamp 53D arranged on the lower side.

Further, a lock 302 for holding and unlocking the closed state of the front door 23 (locking and unlocking the front door 23) is provided at the right end portion of the pachinko gaming machine PY1. The lock 302 has a cylinder structure and can be unlocked and locked by a dedicated key possessed by the game store.

Although detailed description will be omitted, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 includes a polishing device 303 and a lifting device 304 in order to circulate the gaming balls internally. The polishing device 303 and the lifting device 304 are arranged at the lower part of the inner frame 22. All the ejected balls discharged to the outside of the game area 6 through the general winning opening 10, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, the large winning opening 14, and the out opening 19 are all once collected passages (illustrated). None) will be collected.

The collection passage is configured in a straight line or a loose curve so that even when a plurality of game balls flow in at the same time, the balls are arranged and flow down one by one in order and at a constant speed in a stable manner. Then, the collection passage is connected to a storage passage (not shown) in which the game balls circulating inside are finally stored, and the game balls collected in the collection passage subsequently flow into the storage passage. Game balls collected as foul balls also flow into the storage passage. The game balls (discharge balls and foul balls) that have flowed into the storage passage are polished by the polishing device 303. The polished game ball is finally set (supplied) at a predetermined firing position to be launched into the launching device 72 by the lifting device 304.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 does not include the payout control board 170 in the basic embodiment, but includes a frame control board 180. The frame control board 180 mainly controls the game balls such as launching, polishing, and lifting of the game balls, and also controls and manages the number of balls (game balls) to be described later. FIG. 49 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration mainly related to the game control board 100 and the frame control board 180. In FIG. 49, the description of devices such as various display devices and various sensors connected to the game control board 100 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 49, the frame control board 180 is connected to the power supply board 190, and power is supplied from the power supply board 190. Further, the frame control board 180 is connected to the game control board 100 so as to be capable of bidirectional communication. Therefore, it is possible to transmit signals (data / information) from the game control board 100 to the frame control board 180, and it is possible to transmit signals (data / information) from the frame control board 180 to the game control board 100. .. Further, the frame control board 180 is connected to the card unit CU so as to be capable of bidirectional communication. Therefore, the signal (data / information) can be transmitted from the card unit CU to the frame control board 180, and the signal (data / information) can be transmitted from the frame control board 180 to the card unit CU.

When the ball lending button displayed on the unit display device 300 is operated, the unit display device 300 outputs a signal (ball lending operation detection signal) indicating that the operation of the ball lending button is detected to the card unit CU. .. When the ball lending operation detection signal is input, the card unit CU outputs a signal (ball lending request signal) indicating that the ball lending is requested to the frame control board 180.

When the return button displayed on the unit display device 300 is operated, the unit display device 300 outputs a signal (return operation detection signal) indicating that the operation of the return button is detected to the card unit CU. When the return operation detection signal is input, the card unit CU outputs a signal indicating that a return is requested (return request signal) to the frame control board 180.

Further, the card unit CU appropriately updates the credit balance recorded on the IC card in response to the operation of the ball lending button or the return button. Then, in the card unit CU, when the ball lending button is operated, but the credit balance recorded on the IC card is less than the credit associated with one operation of the ball lending button, the ball lending is performed. It is configured so that the operation detection signal is not output to the frame control board 180.

Further, although the launching device 72 is connected to the frame control board 180, the launching control circuit 175 is not mediated as in the basic embodiment. Although the details will be described later, the frame control board 180 directly controls the launch of the game ball by the launcher 72. Further, a polishing device 303 and a lifting device 304 are connected to the frame control board 180. Although the description of the polishing of the game ball by the polishing device 303 and the control of the lifting of the game ball by the lifting device 304 is omitted, the frame control board 180 appropriately controls the polishing device 303 and the lifting device 304. Polishing the game ball and lifting the game ball.

Further, various sensors are connected to the frame control board 180 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Therefore, signals output by various sensors are input to the frame control board 180. Various sensors connected to the frame control board 180 include an unlock detection sensor 302a, a door opening detection sensor 23a, an ejection ball detection sensor 310a, a launch ball detection sensor 311a, and a foul ball detection sensor 312a. ..

The unlock detection sensor 302a can detect that the lock 302 is unlocked, and when the unlock is detected, a signal indicating that the lock 302 is unlocked (unlock detection signal) is transmitted to the frame control board. Output to 180. The door open detection sensor 23a can detect that the front door 23 is open, and when the front door 23 is detected, a signal indicating that the front door 23 is open (door open detection signal) is transmitted to the frame control board 180. Output to.

The ejection ball detection sensor 310a passes through the general winning opening 10, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, the large winning opening 14, and the out opening 19, and is ejected to the outside of the game area 6 (the ejection ball detection sensor 310a). It is provided in the collection passage where the discharge balls) are collected together. The discharge ball detection sensor 310a can detect the discharge ball, and when the discharge ball is detected, a signal indicating that the discharge ball has been generated (discharge ball detection signal) is output to the frame control board 180. The safe ball is a game ball that has passed through the general winning opening 10, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, and the large winning opening 14, and is discharged to the outside of the game area 6, and the out ball is a game ball. Since it is a game ball that has passed through the out port 19 and is discharged to the outside of the game area 6, the discharge ball is a combination of a safe ball and an out ball, and basically enters the game area 6. It matches the game ball that was played.

The launch ball detection sensor 311a can detect a game ball (launch ball) that is launched from a predetermined launch position toward the game area 6 and is moving toward the game area 6 in the launch area 7, and can detect the launch ball. When detected, a signal indicating that a launch ball has been generated (launch ball detection signal) is output to the frame control board 180. The launch ball detection sensor 311a is configured not to detect a game ball that has been launched but cannot reach the game area 6 and moves (backflows) toward a predetermined launch position.

The foul ball detection sensor 312a can detect a foul ball that has been fired but cannot reach the game area 6 and moves (backflows) toward a predetermined firing position and is recovered. When the ball is detected, a signal indicating that a foul ball has been generated (foul ball detection signal) is output to the frame control board 180. Although detailed description will be omitted, the foul ball is a foul ball recovery formed between the boundary between the game area 6 and the launch area 7 and a predetermined launch position to be launched by the launch device 7 of the game ball. Collected from the mouth (not shown). The foul ball collection port allows the game ball to pass toward the game area 6 without disturbing the game ball launched toward the game area 6, and is fired but cannot reach the game area 6 and is predetermined. It is configured to be able to collect the game ball that has returned to the launch position of. The foul ball detection sensor 312a is provided at the foul ball collection port.

The ejection ball detection sensor 310a, the launch ball detection sensor 311a, the foul ball detection sensor 312a, the general winning opening sensor 10a, the first starting opening sensor 11a, the second starting opening sensor 12a, the gate sensor 13a, and the large winning opening. The sensor 14a is configured to be able to detect a game ball made of stainless steel (non-magnetic game ball) that does not stick to the magnet (non-magnetic, non-magnetic). Further, since it is configured to be able to detect a game ball made of stainless steel that does not stick to the magnet, the ejection ball detection sensor 310a, the launch ball detection sensor 311a, the foul ball detection sensor 312a, and the general winning opening sensor 10a, first. The starting port sensor 11a, the second starting port sensor 12a, the gate sensor 13a, and the winning opening sensor 14a have a higher iron content than a stainless steel game ball that does not stick to the magnet and stick to the magnet (has magnetism). It also detects steel game balls (magnetic game balls).

Further, the frame control board 180 is connected to the ball holding number display device 301 so as to be capable of bidirectional communication. Therefore, it is possible to transmit a signal (data / information) from the frame control board 180 to the ball holding number display device 301, and also to transmit a signal (data / information) from the ball holding number display device 301 to the frame control board 180. Is possible.

The ball holding number display device 301 consists of six 7-segment LEDs arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and can be pressed with the ball holding number display 301b that displays the number of balls held, and the number of balls held by the operation. A ball holding number display button 301k for displaying the number of balls held on the display 301b, a display button detection sensor 301a for detecting an operation on the ball holding number display button 301k, and a ball holding number BU on the display device side for storing the number of balls. A unit 301d is provided. When the ball holding number display button 301k is operated, the display button detection sensor 301a transmits a signal (display button detection signal) indicating that the ball holding number display button 301k has been operated to the frame control board 180. Output.

Here, the number of balls held will be described. The number of balls held is the number of game balls that a player can use for a game. As described above, since the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is composed of an enclosed gaming machine, the gaming ball is not physically paid out to the player. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 electronically controls and manages the number of balls held. When the ball lending button displayed on the unit display device 300 is operated, the number of balls held is added by the number of game balls associated with the ball lending button operation. The number of game balls associated with this ball lending button operation can be appropriately set, but in the first embodiment, it is assumed that the number is set to, for example, 250.

Further, when the game ball wins (a safe ball is generated), the number of balls held is added by the number of prize balls according to the winning opening. This number can be set as appropriate, but for example, in the first embodiment, there are 10 general winning openings 10, 4 first starting openings 11, 2 second starting openings 12, and 14 large winning openings. It is assumed that the number is set to 15. In addition, the number of balls held is subtracted one by one each time a game ball is launched. On the other hand, when the game ball is collected from the foul ball collection port and a foul ball is generated, the number of possessed balls is added one by one each time the foul ball is generated.

The sensors 10a, 11a, 12a, and 14a corresponding to the various winning openings output each detection signal to the game control board 100 when the winning is detected, but the game control board 100 has the detection signal related to the winning. Upon input, prize ball processing related to various winning openings in the sensor detection process (S104) (general winning opening prize ball processing (S202), second starting opening prize ball processing (S208), first starting opening winning ball processing (S215)). , Grand prize opening prize ball processing (S224)), a command indicating the number of prize balls (a command for specifying the number of prize balls) is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104, and the set command for specifying the number of prize balls is set by the game control side timer. It is transmitted to the frame control board 180 in the output process (S101) of the interrupt process (S005). That is, information regarding the number of prize balls is transmitted from the game control board 100 to the frame control board 180.

Further, on the frame control board 180, a frame control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as “frame control microcomputer”) 181 that controls the game ball and controls and manages the number of balls held is mounted on the frame control board 180. Therefore, the frame control board 180 can be positioned as a control unit that controls the launch of the game ball, the control related to predetermined items (polishing / transport) other than the launch, and the control / management regarding the number of balls held.

The frame control microcomputer 181 has a frame control ROM 183 that stores programs, tables, etc. for launching game balls, controlling predetermined items (polishing / transporting) other than launching, and controlling / managing the number of balls held. A frame control RAM 184 used as a work memory and a frame control CPU 182 for executing a program stored in the frame control ROM 183 are included.

The frame control ROM 183 stores a program for performing frame control main processing, frame control side timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later. The frame control ROM 183 may be externally attached.

The frame control RAM 184 is provided with a ball holding number storage unit 185 for storing data indicating the number of balls held. As mentioned above, the number of balls held is updated by operating the ball lending button, winning prizes at various winning openings 10, 11, 12, and 14, addition according to the occurrence of foul balls, and subtraction according to the occurrence of launch balls. However, this update is performed by the frame control CPU 182 based on the above-mentioned ball lending request signal, prize ball number designation command, foul ball detection signal, and launch ball detection signal. Then, the frame control CPU 182 updates the data indicating the number of balls stored in the ball holding number storage unit 185.

Further, the frame control RAM 184 is provided with a frame control side ball holding number BU unit 186. The frame control side number of balls held BU unit 186 is provided to back up the data indicating the number of balls held in the number of balls storage unit 185, and the frame control CPU 182 is stored in the number of balls storage unit 185. When updating the stored data indicating the number of balls held, the data indicating the number of balls stored in the frame control side number of balls BU unit 186 is also updated with the same contents.

Further, the frame control side number of balls BU unit 186 has a first number of balls BU area 186a, a second number of balls BU area 186b, and a third number of balls BU area 186c. Each of the first number of balls BU area 186a, the second number of balls BU area 186b, and the third number of balls BU area 186c stores data indicating the number of balls held as a backup. In the frame control side number of balls BU unit 186 (first number of balls BU area 186a, second number of balls BU area 186b, and third number of balls BU area 186c), power supply to the frame control board 180 is stopped. Even if this is done, the data (number of balls held) stored in the frame control side number of balls held BU unit 186 is configured to be held. When the frame control CPU 182 updates the data indicating the number of possessed balls stored in the possessed ball number storage unit 185, the data indicating the same number of possessed balls is stored in the first possession number BU area 186a and the second possession. Each of the ball number BU area 186b and the third ball number BU area 186c is overwritten and saved (backed up).

In the following, the data indicating the number of balls stored in the number of balls storage unit 185 is referred to as "number of balls master data", and the number of balls stored in the frame control side BU unit 186. The data indicating the above may be referred to as "frame control side ball holding number BU data". Further, as the "frame control side number of balls BU data", the data indicating the number of balls stored in the first number of balls BU area 186a is referred to as "first frame control side number of balls BU data", and the first The data indicating the number of balls held in the 2 number of balls BU area 186b is referred to as "the number of balls held on the second frame control side BU data", and the number of balls stored in the third number of balls BU area 186c. The data indicating the above may be referred to as "third frame control side ball holding number BU data".

Further, in addition to the special figure holding storage unit 105, the game RAM 104 of the game control microcomputer 101 is provided with a game control side number of balls BU unit 106 that stores data indicating the number of balls held. In the following, the data indicating the number of balls held in the game control side BU unit 106 is referred to as “game control side number of balls BU data” and is stored in the display device side number of balls BU unit 301d. The data indicating the number of balls held may be referred to as "display device side number of balls held BU data".

7. Control of game balls and management of the number of balls held by the frame control microcomputer 181 [frame control main processing]
Next, control of the game ball and control / management of the number of possessed balls by the frame control microcomputer 181 will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 60. The flowchart for controlling the game ball and controlling / managing the number of balls held is an example described below, and the plurality of processes in the various flowcharts are appropriately performed as long as the processing contents do not conflict with each other. You can change the execution order or execute in parallel.

Further, counters, timers, flags, buffers, etc. that appear in the control of game balls and the management of the number of balls held by the frame control microcomputer 181 described below are provided in the frame control RAM 184. The initial value of the counter is "0", and the initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF".

When the power is supplied, the frame control microcomputer 181 reads out the frame control main processing program shown in FIG. 50 from the frame control ROM 183 and executes it. As shown in the figure, in the frame control main process, first, the power-on process (S5001) is performed. Here, the power-on processing (S5001) will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the power-on processing.

As shown in FIG. 51, in the power-on processing (S5001), the frame control microcomputer 181 first sets the permission for access to the frame control RAM 184 (S5101). This makes it possible to write and read information to the frame control RAM 184. Subsequently, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines whether or not the power cutoff flag is ON (S5102). The power-off flag is a flag indicating the occurrence of a power-off (power supply has been stopped), and is a flag that is turned on in the power-off monitoring process described later.

If the power cutoff flag of the frame control microcomputer 181 is not ON (NO in S5102), the power supply may not be stopped normally, so the process proceeds to step S5108. On the other hand, if the power cutoff flag is ON (YES in S5102), the frame control microcomputer 181 calculates a checksum (S5103) and compares this with the checksum calculated at the time of power failure (S5104). ). The checksum is calculated by regarding various data stored in the frame control RAM 184 as numerical values. If the checksum values do not match (NO in S5104), the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the stored contents of the frame control RAM 184 are not normal (abnormal), and proceeds to step S5108. On the other hand, if the checksum values match (YES in S5104), the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the stored contents of the frame control RAM 184 are normal, and proceeds to step S5105.

In step S5105, the frame control microcomputer 181 manages the setting of the work area of the frame control RAM 184 at the time of power recovery (start of power supply). In this setting process, the frame control microcomputer 181 reads the power recovery information from the frame control ROM 183, and sets the power recovery information in the work area of the frame control RAM 184. After that, the frame control microcomputer 181 turns off the power cutoff flag (S5106), and proceeds to step S5107.

In step S5108, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines whether the number of balls held (the number of balls held on the frame control side BU data) is correct or incorrect, which is stored in the frame control side number of balls BU unit 186. Specifically, as the frame control side ball number BU data stored in the frame control side ball number BU unit 186, the first frame control side ball number BU data (first frame control side ball number BU area 186a). (Number of balls held in the second frame control side), BU data of the number of balls held on the second frame control side (number of balls held on the second frame control side BU area 186b), and balls held on the third frame control side. There is a number BU data (the number of balls held in the third frame control side BU area 186c), but the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the number of balls held by these data is all. Determine if they match.

In the frame control microcomputer 181, if the number of balls held on the frame control side BU unit 186 is not normal, in other words, if all the numbers of balls held do not match (NO in S5108), the number of balls held on the frame control side BU unit 186 It is determined that the stored frame control side ball number BU data (stored content of the frame control side ball number BU unit 186) is not normal (abnormal), and the process proceeds to step S5114. On the other hand, in the frame control microcomputer 181, if the frame control side holding ball number BU unit 186 is normal, in other words, if all the holding ball numbers match (YES in S5108), the frame control side holding ball It is determined that the frame control side ball number BU data (stored content of the frame control side ball number BU unit 186) stored in the number BU unit 186 is normal, and the process proceeds to step S51 1.

In step S511, the frame control microcomputer 181 has a ball held by all of the first frame control side ball number BU data, the second frame control side ball number BU data, and the third frame control side ball number BU data. The number is stored (restored) in the number storage unit 185 as the normal value of the number of balls. Subsequently, in step S5111, the frame control microcomputer 181 clears an area other than the ball holding number storage unit 185 and the frame control side ball holding number BU unit 186 in the frame control RAM 184.

Further, the frame control microcomputer 181 performs initial setting of the work area of the frame control RAM 184 in step S5112, and executes frame control RAM abnormality notification in step S5113 to notify the frame control RAM 184 that the work area is not normal. Then, the process proceeds to step S5007.

In the initial setting of the work area of the frame control RAM 184 in step S5112, the initial setting information read from the frame control ROM 183 is set in the work area of the frame control RAM 184. Further, the frame control microcomputer 181 executes the frame control RAM abnormality notification by using the image display device 50. However, since the frame control board 180 and the image display device 50 are not directly connected, the frame control board 180 plays a frame control RAM abnormality notification request signal requesting execution of the frame control RAM abnormality notification. Output to the control board 100. When the frame control RAM abnormality notification request signal is input, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits a frame control RAM abnormality notification designation command specifying that the frame control RAM abnormality notification is executed to the effect control board 120.

Upon receiving the frame control RAM abnormality notification designation command, the effect control microcomputer 121 causes the image display device 50 to display an image indicating that the frame control RAM 184 is abnormal as the frame control RAM abnormality notification. The specific content of the image showing that the frame control RAM 184 is abnormal can be appropriately set, but the image showing that the frame control RAM 184 is abnormal is, for example, the frame control RAM 184 is abnormal. It is composed of the explanation "The frame control RAM is abnormal. Please call the clerk."

Further, in step S5114, the frame control microcomputer 181 transmits a ball number data request command to the game control board 100. This is because the stored content of the frame control side ball holding number BU unit 186 was not normal (abnormal), so the data indicating the number of balls held back up by the game control board 100 (game control side holding ball). This is to confirm the number BU data). Although detailed description will be omitted, when the game control microcomputer 101 receives the ball holding number data request command, the command indicating the holding ball number stored in the game control side holding ball number BU unit 106 (the above-mentioned game control side holding ball number BU unit 106). The game control side possession number designation command) is transmitted to the frame control board 180. The processing when the game control side possession number designation command is received will be described later.

Subsequently, the frame control microcomputer 181 clears the frame control RAM 184 in step S5115, and proceeds to step S5112.

Further, in step S5107, the frame control microcomputer 181 performs, for example, the frame control CPU 182 and the SIO, PIO, and CTC (circuit for managing the interrupt time) as other initial settings to supply power. Finish the processing at the time of input.

The explanation is returned to the frame control main process (FIG. 50). The frame control microcomputer 181 prohibits interrupts (S5002) and executes output processing (S5003) after the power-on processing. In the output processing, the frame control microcomputer 181 displays various commands and signals stored in the output buffer in the frame control RAM 184 of the frame control board 180 by the game control board 100, the card unit CU, and the number of balls held. It is transmitted to 301 or the launcher 72.

When the frame control microcomputer 181 finishes the output process (S5003), the frame control microcomputer 181 enables an interrupt (S5004). While the interrupt is enabled, the frame control side timer interrupt process (S5005) can be executed. The frame control side timer interrupt process (S5005) is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the frame control CPU 182 at a predetermined cycle (4 ms cycle in the first embodiment). That is, the frame control side timer interrupt process (S5005) is executed in a cycle of 4 ms.

[Frame control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the frame control side timer interrupt processing (S5005) will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the frame control side timer interrupt processing. As shown in FIG. 52, in the frame control side timer interrupt process (S5005), the frame control microcomputer 181 first executes the input process (S5201). In the input process (S5201), the frame control microcomputer 181 takes in various detection signals and various commands, and stores the information indicated by the various detection signals and various commands in the input buffer provided in the frame control RAM 184.

The frame control microcomputer 181 executes the ball holding number restoration process (S5202) after the input process (S5201). The number of possessed balls restoration process (S5202) is a process performed to restore the data regarding the number of possessed balls when it is determined that the result is not normal (NO in S5109) in the correctness determination of the power-on processing (S5001). Is. The ball holding number restoration process (S5202) will be described later.

The frame control microcomputer 181 executes the firing control process (S5203) after the ball holding number restoration process (S5202). The launch control process (S5203) is a process of determining whether or not the game ball can be launched, and if it can be launched, the launching device 72 launches the game ball. The launch control process (S5203) will be described later.

The frame control microcomputer 181 executes the ball holding number management process (S5204) after the launch control process (S5203). The number of possessed balls management process (S5204) is a process for updating the number of possessed balls according to the progress of the game and electronically controlling and managing the number of possessed balls. The ball holding number management process (S5204) will be described later.

The frame control microcomputer 181 executes the fraud detection process (S5205) after the ball holding number management process (S5204). The fraud detection process (S5205) is a process for detecting that the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is fraudulently mixed with an iron gaming ball. The fraud detection process (S5205) will be described later.

The frame control microcomputer 181 executes the firing prohibition process (S5206) after the fraud detection process (S5205). The firing prohibition process (S5206) is a process for detecting whether or not the lock 302 is unlocked, and executing the firing prohibition of the game ball and canceling the firing prohibition according to the presence or absence of the unlocking. The firing prohibition process (S5206) will be described later.

The frame control microcomputer 181 executes the game ball approach blocking process (S5207) after the firing prohibition process (S5206). The game ball entry prevention process (S5207) detects whether or not the front door 23 is open, and executes / cancels the entry prevention of the game ball into the game area 6 depending on whether or not the front door 23 is open. It is a process for. The game ball approach blocking process (S5207) will be described later.

The frame control microcomputer 181 executes other processes (S5208) after the game ball approach blocking process (S5207), and ends the frame control side timer interrupt process (S5005). Other processes (S5208) include power failure monitoring processing when the power supply is cut off, updating the timer provided in the frame control RAM 184, and the like.

As the power cutoff monitoring process, the frame control microcomputer 181 first determines whether or not a power cutoff signal has been input. The power supply cutoff signal is a signal output to the frame control board 180 when the power supply board 190 that monitors the power supply voltage starts to decrease the power supply voltage due to the stop of the power supply. When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that a power supply cutoff signal has been input, the frame control microcomputer 181 calculates a checksum based on the data stored in the frame control RAM 184 and stores it in a predetermined storage area of the frame control RAM 184. Turn on the power off flag. Then, the frame control microcomputer 181 sets the prohibition of access to the frame control RAM 184. This makes it impossible to write or read information to the frame control RAM 184. After that, loop processing is performed without returning to the frame control side timer interrupt processing.

Further, the frame control microcomputer 181 updates various timers provided in the frame control RAM 184, which will be described later, as appropriate for 4 msec as the update of the timer provided in the frame control RAM 184.

Next, various processes (S5202 to S5207) in the frame control side timer interrupt process will be described.

First, the ball holding number restoration process (S5202) will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of the ball holding number restoration process. As shown in FIG. 53, in the possession number restoration process (S5202), the frame control microcomputer 181 first determines whether or not the game control side possession number designation command indicating the possession number has been received (S5301). .. As described above, in the game control side possession number designation command, when the possession number data request command is transmitted to the game control board 100 in step S5113, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the frame control board in response to the transmission. It is a command to send to 180.

As will be described later, each time the frame control microcomputer 181 updates the number of possessed balls in the possessed ball number management process (S5203), a command indicating the updated number of possessed balls (updated number of possessed balls) is used as a backup of the number of possessed balls. The designated command) is transmitted to the game control board 100. When the game control microcomputer 101 receives the command to specify the number of balls held, the number of balls held by the command is used as the number of balls held on the game control side BU data, and the number of balls held on the game control side BU provided in the game RAM 104. It is overwritten and saved (backed up) in the unit 106. Then, when the game control microcomputer 101 receives the ball holding number data request command, the game control side holding ball number BU data indicates the holding ball number indicated by the game control side holding ball number BU unit 106. The designated command is transmitted to the frame control board 180.

When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the possessed ball number designation command has been received (YES in S5301), the frame control microcomputer 181 determines whether or not the possessed ball number indicated by the possessed ball number designation command is larger than 0 (S5302). When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the number of balls held by the ball number designation command is larger than 0 (YES in S5302), in step S5303, the number of balls held is stored in the ball number storage unit 185 and the frame control side. It is stored in the number of balls BU unit 186 (the first number of balls BU area 186a, the second number of balls BU area 186b, and the third number of balls BU area 186c). This is because the number of balls held by the command to specify the number of balls held when the power is turned on is larger than 0, which means that the data stored in the game control board 100 at the time of turning off the power is considered to be normal. This is because the game control side ball number BU data stored in the board 100 is also considered to be normal, and the frame control board 180 is restored with the ball number held as a normal value.

Subsequently, in step S5304, the frame control microcomputer 181 issues a command (ball holding number information transmission request command) requesting transmission of data indicating the number of balls held to the effect control board 120 to the output buffer of the frame control RAM 184. Is set to, and the ball holding number restoration process (S5203) is completed. The fact that the process is proceeding to step S5304 means that the frame control RAM abnormality notification is being executed (S5113), so that there is a possibility that a clerk at the game store may rush to the pachinko gaming machine PY1. This is so that the clerk of the amusement store can easily check the number of balls held.

The ball number information transmission request command set in the output buffer of the frame control RAM 184 is transmitted to the game control board 100 by the output process (S5003). When the game control board 100 receives the ball holding number information transmission request command, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits data indicating the holding ball number to the effect control board 120. When the effect control board 120 receives the data indicating the number of balls held, the effect control board 120 stores the data indicating the number of balls held in the effect control side ball number storage unit (not shown) provided in the effect RAM 124.

The effect control microcomputer 121 stores the number of balls held on the effect control side by receiving the first specific operation (for example, a long press operation for 5 seconds) for the first effect button 40k when the game is not being executed. The display unit 50a displays the number of balls held by the data stored in the unit. Further, in the effect control microcomputer 121, when the number of balls held is displayed on the display unit 50a, the first effect button 40k receives a second specific operation (for example, a normal one-time pressing operation). Have the display unit 50a erase the number of balls held.

On the other hand, when the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the number of balls held by the game control side holding number designation command is not larger than 0, that is, the number of balls held = 0 (NO in S5302), the display device side in step S5305. The ball number data request signal is output to the ball number display device 301, and the ball number restoration process (S5202) is completed. This is because the number of balls held by the game control side ball holding number designation command is "0" when the power is turned on, which means that the data stored in the game control board 100 when the power is turned off is abnormal, and the game RAM 104 has. Since it is considered that the game has been cleared, as will be described later, as a further backup of the number of balls held, the data regarding the number of balls held in the ball holding number display device 301 (the number of balls held BU data on the display device side) is requested. Is.

Further, as will be described later, each time the frame control microcomputer 181 updates the number of possessed balls in the ball possession number management process (S5203), the signal indicating the updated number of possessed balls is used as a backup of the data indicating the number of possessed balls. (Position number update designation signal) is output to the ball number display device 301. When the number of possessed balls update designation signal is input, the number of possessed balls display device 301 overwrites and saves the number of possessed balls indicated by the signal in the number of possessed balls BU unit 301d on the display device side as BU data of the number of possessed balls on the display device side. .. Then, when the display device side ball holding number data request signal is input, the ball holding number display device 301 has the ball holding number indicated by the display device side ball holding number BU data stored in the display device side holding ball number BU unit 301d. A signal for designating the number of balls to be held is transmitted to the frame control board 180.

Further, when the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the possessed ball number designation command has not been received (NO in S5301), it determines whether or not the possessed ball number designation signal has been input (S5306). When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the display device-side possession number designation signal has not been input (NO in S5306), the frame control microcomputer 181 completes the possession number restoration process (S5202) and determines that the possession number designation signal has been input. Then (YES in S5306), it is determined whether or not the number of balls held by the number of balls designated signal is larger than 0 (S5307).

When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the number of balls held by the ball number designation signal is larger than 0 (YES in S5307), in step S5308, the number of balls held is stored in the ball number storage unit 185 and the frame control side. It is stored in the number of balls BU unit 186 (the first number of balls BU area 186a, the second number of balls BU area 186b, and the third number of balls BU area 186c), and the number of balls restoration process (S5202) is completed. .. This is because the number of balls held by the number of balls specified signal is larger than 0, which means that the number of balls held BU data on the display device side stored in the number of balls displayed device 301 is considered to be normal. This is to restore the frame control board 180 with the number of balls held as a normal value.

On the other hand, when the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the number of balls held by the display device side ball holding number designation signal is not larger than 0, that is, the number of balls held = 0 (NO in S5306), the number of balls held in step S5309. Is executed to notify that the number of balls held is abnormal, and the process of restoring the number of balls held (S5203) is completed. This is because the number of balls held by the display device side ball holding number designation signal is "0", which means that the display device side ball holding number BU data stored in the ball holding number display device 301 is considered to be abnormal. Since there is no further backup of the number of possessed balls, it is assumed that an abnormality has occurred in the number of possessed balls, and the error notification of the number of possessed balls for notifying the abnormality is executed.

The ball holding number error notification is executed on the ball holding number display 301b of the ball holding number display device 301. Therefore, in step S5309, the frame control microcomputer 181 sets a signal requesting execution of the ball number error notification (ball number error notification request signal) in the output buffer of the frame control RAM 184. The ball holding number error notification request signal set in the output buffer is output to the holding ball number display device 301 in the output process (S5003), and the holding ball number display device 301 receives the holding ball number error notification request signal when the holding ball number error notification request signal is input. Execute number error notification.

The content of the ball number error notification can be appropriately designed, but in the first embodiment, for example, in the last five digits composed of six 7-segment LEDs, the phrase "ERROR" indicating an error is used. Is displayed. Further, the frame control microcomputer 181 may execute the ball holding number error notification by displaying an image on the display unit 50a and outputting a predetermined voice and a warning sound from the speaker 52.

Further, in step S5309, the frame control microcomputer 181 may set a command requesting execution of the ball holding number error notification in the output buffer of the frame control RAM 184. The command set in the output buffer is transmitted to the game control board 100 in the output process (S5003), and when the game control board 100 receives the command, the game control board 100 issues a command to specify the execution of the ball number error notification. When the effect control board 120 receives the command, the image display device 50 or the speaker 52 may be made to execute the ball holding number error notification as appropriate.

Next, the launch control process (S5203) will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an example of the launch control process. As shown in FIG. 54, in the launch control process (S5203), the frame control microcomputer 181 determines whether or not the number of balls held by the master data of the number of balls held is larger than "0" (S5301). This is because the number of balls held is the number of game balls that the player can use for the game, and the game cannot be executed unless the number of balls held is larger than "0".

When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the number of balls held is not larger than "0", that is, the number of balls held = "0" (NO in S5401), the process proceeds to step S5419, and the number of balls held is larger than "0". If it is determined (YES in S5401), it indicates whether or not the lock 302 is unlocked, in other words, it is in a state where the launch of the game ball is prohibited due to the unlocking of the lock 302 described later. It is determined whether or not the firing prohibition flag is turned on (S5402). This is because when the lock 302 is unlocked, the front door 23 is opened, and the fired game ball may jump out of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 and lose the game ball. This is because it is necessary to prohibit firing. The firing prohibition flag is basically turned on in a predetermined area of the frame control RAM 184 when the lock 302 is unlocked.

When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the lock 302 is unlocked (YES in S5402), the process proceeds to step S5419, and when it is determined that the lock 302 is not unlocked (YES in S5402), the firing handle 72k is set. It is determined whether or not the player is in contact with the player, in other words, whether or not the detection signal from the touch switch 72a is input (S5403). This is to make it a condition for the player to operate the launch handle 72k to launch the game ball, and to prevent the launch handle 72k from being fixed by using coins or a predetermined device.

If the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the launch handle 72k is not in contact with the player (NO in S5403), the process proceeds to step S5419, and if it is determined that the launch handle 72k is in contact with the player (YES in S5403). ), Whether or not the firing handle 72k is operated, in other words, whether or not the detection signal from the firing volume knob 72b is input (S5404). This is because the game ball can be launched by operating the launch handle 72k.

When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the firing handle 72k is not operated (NO in S5404), the process proceeds to step S5419, and when it is determined that the firing handle 72k is operated (YES in S5404), the firing delay is executed. It is determined whether or not the flag is inside, in other words, whether or not the launch delay flag described later is turned on (S5405).

The firing delay is a predetermined unit firing in order to adjust the number of firing balls per unit time (a fixed time such as 60 seconds) to a predetermined value while the firing handle 72k is continuously operated. The start of control is delayed (the cycle is delayed by N balls once), the cycle related to the launch of the game ball is changed for the local unit launch control, and the cycle related to the launch of the game ball is adjusted. Control (control to change the firing cycle). That is, the unit launch control is a control related to the launch of a single game ball, and in order to adjust the number of launches of the game ball per unit time to a predetermined value, the unit launch control is a single launch of the game ball. After the launch, it is composed of an interval (launch standby) in which the launch is waited until the next game ball can be launched, and is executed in a predetermined cycle. The details of the firing delay (fire cycle change control) and the unit firing control will be described later. The firing delay flag is turned on in a predetermined area of the frame control RAM 184 while the firing delay (fire cycle change control) is being executed (during the execution of the firing delay). Further, although the details will be described later, in the first embodiment, the firing delay (fire cycle change control) is executed for the same time as the time required for one frame control timer interrupt processing.

When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the firing delay is being executed (YES in S5405), the firing delay is canceled, specifically, the firing delay flag is turned off (S5418), and the firing delay is not being executed. If it is determined (NO in S5405), it is determined whether or not the launch standby is being executed, in other words, whether or not the launch standby flag described later is turned on (S5406).

The execution of the launch standby is a unit related to the launch of one game ball in order to adjust the number of game balls to be fired per unit time to a predetermined value while the launch handle 72k is continuously operated. It is to make the launch of the game ball wait in the launch control. The details of the launch standby will be described later. The launch standby flag is turned on in a predetermined area of the frame control RAM 184 while the launch standby is being executed (during the execution of the launch standby).

When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the launch standby is being executed (YES in S5406), the process proceeds to step S5412, and when it is determined that the launch standby is not being executed (NO in S5406), the game ball to be started from now on. It is determined whether or not the firing (unit firing control) corresponds to the start of the unit firing control, in other words, whether or not the counter value of the firing delay activation counter described later is “0” (S5407).

The unit launch control is a control related to the launch of a game ball, which is performed to adjust the number of game balls to be fired per unit time to a predetermined value while the launch handle 72k is continuously operated. It is composed of a unit firing control of a predetermined number of times (4 times in the first embodiment) and a firing delay (fire cycle change control) of a predetermined number of times (1 time in the first embodiment), and is executed in a predetermined cycle as a whole. .. Although the details will be described later, in the unit launch control, the launch delay (launch cycle change control) is performed after the unit launch control related to the launch of one game ball is repeatedly executed a plurality of times (four times in the first embodiment). It is executed a predetermined number of times (once in the first embodiment). Then, the firing delay activation counter counts the remaining number of firings of the game ball in one unit firing control, and is provided in a predetermined area of the frame control RAM 184. The firing of the game ball when the counter value of the firing delay activation counter is "0" constitutes the start of the unit firing control.

When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the unit launch control is to be started (YES in S5407), the unit launch control is to be started from now on, so that the number of game balls fired in one unit launch control (number of unit launches). ) Is set in the launch delay activation counter (S5408), and the process proceeds to step S5409. In the first embodiment, the number of units fired is set to four.

In step S5409, the frame control microcomputer 181 causes the launching device 72 to launch the game ball with the firing intensity corresponding to the operation of the firing handle 72k in response to the detection signal from the knob 72b of the firing volume. Fire a game ball. Subsequently, the frame control microcomputer 181 executes a launch standby (S5410) in order to provide an interval for not firing the game ball after the launch of the game ball, and sets an execution period of the launch standby (S5411). , The firing control process is completed.

The execution of the firing standby is performed by turning on the firing standby flag in a predetermined area of the frame control RAM 184. Further, the execution period of the launch standby is set by using the launch standby counter. The firing standby counter is provided in a predetermined area of the frame control RAM 184, and determines the number of times the frame control timer interrupt processing is executed (150 times in the first embodiment) corresponding to the period during which the firing standby is executed. By setting to, the execution period of the launch standby is set.

Since the frame control timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms, the interval until the next launch of the game ball, in other words, the time required for one unit launch control is 600 ms (4 ms x 150 times). )It turns out that.

Further, the frame control microcomputer 181 updates the remaining period of the firing standby execution period (launch waiting remaining period) in step S5412, and determines whether or not to end the firing standby in step S5413. The update of the remaining firing standby period is performed by subtracting the counter value of the firing standby counter by "1". Further, the determination as to whether or not to end the firing standby is performed by confirming whether or not the counter value of the firing standby counter is "0".

When it is determined that the frame control microcomputer 181 does not end the firing standby, that is, when the counter value of the firing standby counter is not "0" (NO in S5413), the firing standby (interval) related to one unit firing control. Since it is in the middle of, the firing control process is finished as it is. On the other hand, when the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the firing standby is terminated, that is, when the counter value of the firing standby counter is "0" (YES in S5413), the firing standby related to one unit firing control (interval). ) Is completed (S5414), the remaining period until the launch delay is executed (launch delay execution remaining period) is updated (S5415), and it is determined whether or not to start the launch delay (S5415). S5416).

The end of the launch standby is performed by turning off the launch standby flag. The update of the firing delay execution remaining period is performed by subtracting the counter value of the firing delay activation counter by "1". Further, the determination of whether or not to start the firing delay is performed by confirming whether or not the counter value of the firing delay activation counter is "0".

When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the firing delay is not started, that is, when the counter value of the firing delay activation counter is not "0" (NO in S5416), the game ball is fired before the firing delay is performed. If it is determined to start the firing delay, that is, if the counter value of the firing delay activation counter is "0" (YES in S5416), the firing delay is started (S5417), and the firing control process is performed. To finish. Execution of the firing delay is performed by turning on the firing delay flag.

Further, when the frame control microcomputer 181 performs the reset process related to the launch control process in step S5418, the frame control microcomputer 181 ends the launch control process. The reset process related to the launch control process is performed by resetting the flags and counters related to the launch control process. As a result, the unit launch control and the unit launch control are stopped, and when the game ball is launched again, the unit launch control and the unit launch control are executed from the beginning.

Next, the launch control of the game ball by the frame control microcomputer 181 when the launch handle 72k is continuously operated in the situation where the launch of the game ball is permitted will be described. As long as the firing handle 72k is continuously operated, the firing control process (S5204) by the frame control microcomputer 181, particularly step S5405 to step S5414, is executed to launch the game ball intermittently. When this intermittent firing is performed, the number of game balls fired per unit time (specific number of shots) is the largest, and the frame control microcomputer 181 fires the game balls per minute. The launch of the game ball is controlled so that the number of the game balls (the number of launch balls of the game ball) is about 99.83. This is stipulated by a predetermined rule that the number of launching balls of a game ball per minute is less than 100, but if the number of launching balls of a game ball per unit time becomes extremely small, the game store side will not be able to do so. This is to make the number of game balls fired per unit time appropriate within the range where the upper limit is not exceeded where there is a risk of profit. However, since the clock that causes the frame control microcomputer 181 to perform the frame control side timer interrupt processing may fluctuate due to the frequency change of the crystal oscillator due to the room temperature deviation and frequency temperature characteristics, the number of game balls fired in one minute. It is not appropriate to keep the frequency as close to 100 as possible.

Here, FIG. 55 shows a time chart showing an example of launch control of a game ball when the launch handle 72k is continuously operated. As described above, there are unit launch control and unit launch control as launch control of the game ball.

The unit launch control is a basic unit of control related to the launch of one game ball, is started by the launch of the game ball, and ends 600 msec after the launch. Therefore, the unit firing control forms a cycle (launch cycle) related to the firing of one game ball. In one unit firing control, the period from the first firing of the game ball to the lapse of 600 msec is a standby for firing, which constitutes an interval period in which the game ball is not fired. Since the frame control side timer interrupt process including the launch control process (S5203) is executed every 4 ms for 600 msec related to the interval, the period for 150 times of the launch control process (frame control side timer interrupt process). It turns out that. Therefore, the frame control microcomputer 181 fires the game ball in the firing control process (frame control side timer interrupt process), and then fires the game ball in the 150 launch control process (frame control side timer interrupt process). Instead, wait for the game ball to be launched.

The unit launch control is a basic unit of control related to the launch of four game balls, and is composed of four consecutive unit launch controls and one launch delay (launch cycle change control). Since the launch control process (timer interrupt process on the frame control side) is executed every 4 ms, if the unit launch control is continuously executed without performing the launch delay (fire cycle change control), the game ball in one minute The number of fires will be 100, and the rule of less than 100 will not be satisfied. Therefore, by executing the unit launch control four times in a row, executing one launch delay (launch cycle change control), and then starting the next unit launch control, the number of launch balls of the game ball in one minute. To be less than 100. Then, one unit launch control is configured by these four consecutive unit launch controls and one subsequent launch delay (launch cycle change control), and this unit launch control is repeated as one set in a broad sense. I will do it. As a result, the number of game balls launched in one minute is about 99.83. The time required for one firing delay (firing cycle change control) is 4 ms. That is, one firing delay (fire cycle change control) is a period equivalent to one firing control process (frame control side timer interrupt process).

Next, the ball holding number management process (S5204) will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the ball holding number management process. As shown in FIG. 56, in the ball holding number management process (S5204), the frame control microcomputer 181 first determines whether or not the ball lending button displayed on the unit display device 300 has been operated (S5501). As described above, when the ball lending button is operated, the unit display device 300 outputs a ball lending operation detection signal indicating that the operation has been detected to the card unit CU. When the ball lending operation detection signal is input, the card unit CU outputs a signal (ball lending request signal) indicating that the ball lending is requested to the frame control board 180. Therefore, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines in step S5501 whether or not the ball lending request signal has been input.

When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the ball lending button has not been operated (NO in S5501), the process proceeds to step S5504, and when it is determined that the ball lending button has been operated (YES in S5501), the game according to the ball lending. The number of balls (250 in the first embodiment) is added to the number of balls (S5502), the update flag indicating that the number of balls held has been updated is turned ON (S5503), and the process proceeds to step S5504.

The addition of the number of possessed balls in step S5502 is performed by adding the number of game balls according to the ball lending to the number of possessed balls indicated by the possessed ball number master data stored in the possessed ball number storage unit 185. Further, the update flag is turned ON in a predetermined area of the frame control RAM 184.

In step S5504, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines whether or not there has been a prize (generation of a safe ball) in the winning openings (general winning opening 10, first starting opening 11, second starting opening 12, large winning opening 14). judge. As described above, when there is a prize (generation of a safe ball) in various winning openings, the game control microcomputer 101 issues a command (command for specifying the number of prize balls) indicating the number of prize balls according to the winning, to the frame control board 180. Send to. Therefore, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines in step S5504 whether or not the prize ball number designation command has been received.

When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that there is no prize (generation of a safe ball) in the winning openings (general winning opening 10, first starting opening 11, second starting opening 12, large winning opening 14) (NO in S5504). ), Proceed to step S5507, and if it is determined that there has been a prize in the winning openings (general winning opening 10, first starting opening 11, second starting opening 12, large winning opening 14) (YES in S5504), the number of prize balls is counted. The corresponding number of prize balls is added to the number of balls (S5505), the update flag is turned ON (S5506), and the process proceeds to step S5507.

The addition to the number of balls held in step S5505 is performed by adding the number of prize balls indicated by the command for specifying the number of prize balls to the number of balls held by the master data of the number of balls stored in the number storage unit 185. Will be. In the first embodiment, the number of prize balls based on the prize in the general winning opening 10 is 10, the number of prize balls based on the winning in the first starting port 11 is 4, and the number of prize balls based on the winning in the first starting port 11 is 4. The number of prize balls based on winning a prize is 2, and the number of prize balls based on winning a prize in the large winning opening 14 is 15.

In step S5507, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines whether or not there is a foul ball. As described above, when a foul ball is generated, the foul ball detection sensor 312a outputs a foul ball detection signal to the frame control board 180. Therefore, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines in step S5507 whether or not the foul ball detection signal has been input.

When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that there is no foul ball (NO in S5507), the process proceeds to step S5510, and when it is determined that there is a foul ball (YES in S5507), the number of game balls corresponding to the foul ball (1 piece). ) Is added to the number of balls (S5508), the update flag is turned ON (S5509), and the process proceeds to step S5510. The addition of the number of possessed balls in step S5508 is performed by adding "1" to the number of possessed balls indicated by the number of possessed balls master data stored in the number of possessed balls storage unit 185. This is because foul balls are detected one by one, and the number of foul balls is increased by one due to the generation of foul balls.

In step S5510, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines whether or not there is a launch ball. As described above, when the launch ball is generated, the launch ball detection sensor 311a outputs the launch ball detection signal to the frame control board 180. Therefore, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines in step S5510 whether or not the launch ball detection signal has been input.

When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that there is no launch ball (NO in S5510), the process proceeds to step S5513, and when it is determined that there is a launch ball (YES in S5510), the number of game balls according to the launch ball (1 piece). ) Is subtracted from the number of balls (S5511), the update flag is turned ON (S5512), and the process proceeds to step S5513. The subtraction from the number of possessed balls in step S5511 is performed by subtracting "1" from the number of possessed balls indicated by the number of possessed balls master data stored in the number of possessed balls storage unit 185. This is because the launching balls are detected one by one, and the number of launching balls is reduced by one due to the generation of the launching balls.

In step S5513, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines whether or not the update flag is turned on, in other words, whether or not the number of balls held is added or subtracted (updated). When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the update flag is not turned ON (NO in S5513), the frame control microcomputer 181 proceeds to step S5518. On the other hand, when the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the update flag is ON (YES in S5513), the number of balls held for frame control is backed up by the update of the number of balls held. A backup process is performed (S5514), a game control ball number backup process is performed (S5515), a display device ball count backup process is performed (S5516), and the process proceeds to step S5518.

In the frame control number of balls backup process, the number of balls held by the number of balls master data is stored in the first number of balls BU area 186a, the number of balls held on the first frame control side BU data, and the number of second balls held. Reflected (overwritten) in the second frame control side ball number BU data stored in the number BU area 186b and the third frame control side ball number BU data stored in the third frame number BU area 186c. It is done by.

The game control number of balls backup process is performed by setting the number of balls to be updated designation command indicating the number of balls to be held indicated by the number of balls to be held master data in the output buffer of the frame control RAM 184. The ball holding number update designation command set in the output buffer is transmitted to the game control board 100 by the output process (S5003). Although not shown, when the game control microcomputer 101 receives the command to specify the number of balls to be held, the game control side holds the number of balls indicated by the command in the game control side holding number BU unit 106. Reflect (overwrite) in the number of balls BU data. As a result, the data regarding the number of balls held by the game control board 100 is updated.

The holding ball number backup process for the display device is performed by setting the holding ball number update designation signal indicating the holding ball number indicated by the holding ball number master data in the output buffer of the frame control RAM 184. The ball holding number update designation signal set in the output buffer is transmitted to the ball holding number display device 301 by the output process (S5003). Although not shown, the number of possessed balls display device 301, when the number of possessed balls update designation signal is input, the number of possessed balls indicated by the signal is stored in the number of possessed balls storage area 301d on the display device side. Reflect (overwrite) in BU data. As a result, the data regarding the number of balls held by the ball holding number display device 301 is updated.

In step S5518, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines whether or not the return button displayed on the unit display device 300 has been operated. As described above, when the return button is operated, the unit display device 300 outputs a return operation detection signal indicating that the operation has been detected to the card unit CU. When the return operation detection signal is input, the card unit CU outputs a signal indicating that a return is requested (return request signal) to the frame control board 180. Therefore, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines in step S5518 whether or not the return request signal has been input.

When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the return button has not been operated (NO in S5518), the frame control microcomputer 181 finishes the ball holding number management process, and determines that the return button has been operated (YES in S5518), the return button is operated. In order to clear the information regarding the number of balls held according to the above, the number of balls held for frame control is cleared (S5519), the number of balls held for game control is cleared (S5520), and the number of balls held for the display device is backed up. (S5521), the ball holding number signal indicating the holding ball number indicated by the holding ball number master data is set in the output buffer of the frame control RAM 184 (S5522), and the holding ball number management process is completed.

The frame control number holding ball number clearing process clears the holding ball number storage unit 185 and the frame control side holding ball number BU unit 186, and also clears various data related to the holding ball number.

The game control number of balls clearing process is performed by setting a command for clearing the number of balls held to instruct to clear the data related to the number of balls held in the output buffer of the frame control RAM 184. The command for clearing the number of balls held in the output buffer is transmitted to the game control board 100 by the output process (S5003). Although not shown, the game control microcomputer 101 clears the game control side ball number BU data stored in the game control side ball number BU unit 106 when the game control side ball number clear designation command is received. As a result, the data regarding the number of balls held in the game control board 100 is erased.

The display control number-of-balls clearing process is performed by setting a ball-holding number clear designation signal instructing to clear the data related to the number of balls in the output buffer of the frame control RAM 184. The ball holding number clear designation signal set in the output buffer is output to the ball holding number display device 301 by the output process (S5003). Although not shown, the holding ball number display device 301 clears the display device side holding ball number BU data stored in the display device side holding ball number BU unit 301d when the holding ball number clear designation signal is input. As a result, the data regarding the number of balls stored in the ball number display device 301 is deleted.

Further, the number of balls held signal set in the output buffer of the frame control RAM 184 in step S5522 is output to the card unit CU by the output process (S5003). When the ball holding number signal is input, the card unit CU updates the holding ball number recorded on the IC card to the holding ball number indicated by the holding ball number signal.

In addition, after the return button is operated, the safe ball, the out ball, the foul ball, and the launch ball are generated, so that the number of balls recorded on the IC card and the actual number of balls are different. In order to prevent this, the operation of the return button may be restricted to the state in which the game is not performed.

Next, the fraud detection process (S5205) will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of fraud detection processing. As shown in FIG. 57, in the fraud detection process (S5205), the frame control microcomputer 181 first determines whether or not there is an ejected ball, in other words, whether or not the ejected ball detection signal from the ejected ball detection sensor 310a is input. (S5601). As described above, the ejection ball detection sensor 310a is ejected to the outside of the game area 6 through various winning openings (general winning opening 10, first starting opening 11, second starting opening 12, large winning opening 14). The game ball (safe ball) and the game ball (out ball) discharged to the outside of the game area 6 through the out port 19 are collected and installed in a collection passage. That is, the game ball that has entered the game area 6 always finally passes through the collection passage as a discharge ball.

When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that there is an ejected ball (YES in S5601), it indicates whether or not the ejected ball detection time is being measured, in other words, the ejected ball detecting time is being measured. It is determined whether or not the detection time measurement flag is ON (S5602). The ejection ball detection time measurement flag is turned on in a predetermined area of the frame control RAM 184. The discharge ball detection time is the time during which the discharge ball detection sensor 310a outputs the discharge ball detection signal, in other words, a steel game ball or a stainless steel game ball in which the discharge ball detection sensor 310a sticks to a magnet. It is the time of detection.

When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the ejection ball detection time has not been measured (NO in S5602), the frame control microcomputer 181 starts measuring the ejection ball detection time (S5603), and ends the fraud detection process (S5206). The measurement of the discharge ball detection time is started by turning on the discharge ball detection time measurement flag in a predetermined area of the frame control RAM 184. The fact that it is determined that the ejection ball detection time has not been measured in step S5602 means that the ejection ball detection signal has changed from OFF to ON. This is because the measurement of the ejection ball detection time is started when the ejection ball detection signal changes from OFF (undetected) to ON (detection).

When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the ejected ball detection time is being measured (YES in S5602), the ejected ball detection time is updated (S5604), and the fraud detection process (S5206) is completed. The ejection ball detection time is measured by adding the time (4 msec) for one time of the frame control timer interrupt process to the ejection ball detection time timer provided in the frame control RAM 184. It should be noted that the determination that the ejection ball detection time is being measured in step S5602 means that the ejection ball detection signal is continuously turned on. This is because the ejection ball detection time is measured while the ejection ball detection signal is ON. Therefore, the discharge ball detection time timer indicates the time when the discharge ball detection signal is ON.

Further, when the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that there is no ejected ball (NO in S5601), whether or not the ejected ball detection time is being measured, in other words, whether or not the ejected ball detection time measurement flag is ON. (S5605). When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the ejection ball detection time has not been measured (NO in S5605), the frame control microcomputer 181 ends the fraud detection process (S5205) as it is.

When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the ejection ball detection time is being measured (YES in S5605), the ejection ball detection time, in other words, the value indicated by the ejection ball detection time timer is a predetermined illegally specified time (for example, It is determined whether or not it is larger than 12 ms) (S5606). When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the ejected ball detection time is not larger than the predetermined illegal designation time (for example, 12 ms) (NO in S5606), the process proceeds to step S5608, and the ejected ball detection time is specified illegally. If it is determined that the time is longer than the time (for example, 12 ms) (YES in S5606), an unauthorized notification is performed (S5607).

Here, the discharge ball detection sensor 310a will be described. As described above, the ejection ball detection sensor 310a detects a game ball made of Steres that does not stick to the magnet, but has a higher iron content than the game ball made of stainless steel and is made of conventional general steel that sticks to the magnet. It also detects game balls. As a specification of the discharge ball detection sensor 310a, the discharge ball detection sensor 310a detects a passing game ball made of steel that sticks to the magnet for a longer time than that made of stainless steel that does not stick to the magnet, and turns it on. Become. Therefore, an illegal designation time is set so that the difference between stainless steel and steel can be discerned. Conversely, when a stainless steel game ball that does not stick to the magnet passes through the ejection ball detection sensor 310a, the ejection ball detection sensor 310a does not keep turning on the ejection ball detection signal for an illegally specified time. Therefore, the fact that the ejection ball detection time is longer than the predetermined illegally specified time (for example, 12 ms) means that the conventional general steel gaming ball that sticks to the magnet has passed through the ejection ball detection sensor 310a, in other words. It means that the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is mixed with a conventional general steel gaming ball that sticks to a magnet. For example, the discharge ball detection sensor 310a is turned on for the first time (t1) when one game ball made of stainless steel that does not stick to the magnet passes through the discharge ball detection sensor 310a, and the game is made of stainless steel. It is longer than the first time (t1) when one conventional general steel game ball, which has a higher iron content than the ball and sticks to the magnet, passes through the ejection ball detection sensor 310a at the same speed. Assuming that the specification is that the second time (t2) is turned on, the illegally specified time is set between the first time (t1) and the second time (t2). Further, when two stainless steel game balls that do not stick to the magnet pass in succession, the discharge ball detection sensor 310a can distinguish between the two passages, but the steel game ball that sticks to the magnet has two. When passing in succession, it is configured so that the two passages cannot be detected separately. The specific value of the illegally specified time can be set as appropriate.

Further, the fraudulent notification in step S5607 is performed by the output of a predetermined alarm sound by the speaker 52. Since the frame control board 180 and the staging control board 120 are not directly connected, the frame control board 180 has a higher iron content than the stainless steel game ball, and one steel game ball that sticks to the magnet is used. A fraudulent notification request command requesting to output (execute fraudulent notification) a predetermined alarm sound indicating that the pachinko machine PY1 is mixed (detected) is set in the output buffer of the frame control RAM 184. do. The set fraud notification request command is transmitted to the game control board 100 by the output process (S5003). Upon receiving the fraudulent notification request command, the game control microcomputer 101 transmits a fraudulent notification designation command specifying that the fraudulent notification is to be executed to the effect control board 120. When the effect control microcomputer 121 receives the fraudulent notification designation command, the effect control microcomputer 121 appropriately executes the fraudulent notification.

In step S5608, the frame control microcomputer 181 ends the measurement of the ejection ball detection time, and ends the fraud detection process (S5206). The end of the measurement of the discharge ball detection time is performed by turning off the discharge ball detection time measurement flag and resetting the discharge ball detection time timer.

Next, the firing prohibition process (S5206) will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of the firing prohibition process. As shown in FIG. 58, in the firing prohibition process (S5206), the frame control microcomputer 181 first determines whether or not the lock 302 is unlocked (S5701). As described above, the unlock detection sensor 302a is configured to be able to detect that the lock 302 is unlocked, and outputs an unlock detection signal to the frame control board 180 when the lock 302 is unlocked. .. Therefore, in step S5701, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines whether or not the unlock detection signal from the unlock detection sensor 302a is input.

When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the lock 302 is unlocked (YES in S5701), it determines whether or not the launch of the game ball is prohibited (launch is prohibited) (S5702). When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the firing is not prohibited (NO in S5702), the frame control microcomputer 181 ends the firing prohibition process (S5702) as it is. On the other hand, when the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the firing is prohibited (YES in S5702), the firing prohibition (launch prohibition) of the game ball is executed (S5703), and the firing prohibition for notifying that the firing is prohibited is executed. The notification effect is executed (S5704), and the firing prohibition process (S5207) is completed.

The fact that it is determined in step S5702 that the firing is not prohibited means that the unlocking detection signal has changed from OFF to ON, in other words, the lock 302 has been unlocked from the locked state. .. This is because the firing prohibition is started when the unlock detection signal is changed from OFF to ON. Further, the fact that the lock 302 is unlocked from the locked state means that the front door 23 may be opened, and when the front door 23 is opened, the game ball moves to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine PY1. Since there is a risk of popping out and being lost, a firing ban is enforced. The firing prohibition is performed by turning on the firing prohibition flag. The firing prohibition flag is turned on in a predetermined area of the frame control RAM 184. Then, this launch prohibition (launch) constitutes a condition (step S5402) for prohibiting the launch of the game ball in the launch control process (S5203) described above. Specifically, in step S5402, it is determined that "launching is prohibited" (YES in S5402).

Further, the firing prohibition notification effect is performed by the unit display device 300. Since the frame control board 180 and the unit display device 300 are not directly connected, the frame control board 180 requests the firing prohibition notification effect to execute the firing prohibition notification effect to notify that the firing is prohibited. Is set in the output buffer of the frame control RAM 184. The emission prohibition notification effect request signal set in the output buffer is output to the card unit CU by the output process (S5003). When the firing prohibition notification effect request signal is input, the card unit CU causes the unit display device 300 to display an image indicating that firing is prohibited as a firing prohibition notification effect. The specific content of the image indicating that firing is prohibited can be appropriately set, but the image indicating that firing is prohibited is, for example, the explanatory text "launching a game ball" indicating that firing is prohibited. Is now in a state where it cannot be done. "

When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the lock 302 is not unlocked (NO in S5701), it determines whether or not the firing of the game ball is prohibited (launch is prohibited) (S5705). When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the launch is not prohibited (NO in S5705), the launch prohibition process (S5206) is completed as it is, and when it is determined that the launch is prohibited (YES in S5705), the launch permission state is entered. It is determined whether or not the device is waiting (S5706).

The waiting state for the firing permission state is the transition period from the firing prohibition state to the firing permission state. The reason why such a transition period is provided is that it is determined in step S5705 that firing is prohibited, that the unlock detection signal is changed from ON to OFF, in other words, the lock 302 is unlocked. This means that the pachinko machine has been locked from the state in which it is locked, for example, it may be necessary to have a grace period for the final confirmation of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 after the clerk of the game store is locked. In addition, the launch of the game ball is prohibited even while waiting for the launch permission state.

The start of waiting for the launch permission state is performed by turning on the launch permission state standby flag, which will be described later. Therefore, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines in step S5706 whether or not the launch permission state standby flag is turned ON. The firing permission state standby flag is turned on in a predetermined area of the frame control RAM 184.

When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that it is not waiting for the firing permission state (NO in S5706), it starts waiting for the firing permission state (S5707), that is, the frame control RAM 184 is permitted to fire in a predetermined area. Turn on the state standby flag, execute the launch permission standby notification effect to notify that the player waits until the launch permission state (S5708), and the remaining time until the wait until the launch permission state is completed (launch permission standby remaining time). The measurement is started (S5709), and the launch prohibition process (S5206) is completed.

The launch permission standby notification effect is performed by the unit display device 300. Since the frame control board 180 and the unit display device 300 are not directly connected, the frame control board 180 requests to execute a firing permission standby notification effect for notifying that the frame control board 180 waits until the firing is permitted. The permission standby notification effect request signal is set in the output buffer of the frame control RAM 184. The launch permission standby notification effect request signal set in the output buffer is output to the card unit CU by the output process (S5003). When the launch permission standby notification effect request signal is input, the card unit CU causes the unit display device 300 to display an image indicating that the unit display device 300 waits until the launch is permitted as the launch permission standby notification effect. The specific content of the image showing that the vehicle waits until the launch is permitted can be appropriately set, but the image indicating that the image waits until the launch is permitted is, for example, until the launch is permitted. It consists of the explanation "Please wait a little longer until it can be fired" indicating that it will wait.

Further, the firing permission waiting time remaining time is performed by using the firing permission waiting time timer. The firing permission waiting time timer is provided in a predetermined area of the frame control RAM 184, and the firing permission waiting time timer is set to wait for a predetermined firing permission state (for example, 30 seconds) to wait for firing permission. The measurement of the remaining time is started. The firing permission standby time timer is subtracted for 4 msec in the other processing (S5208) of the frame control side timer interrupt processing (S5005).

When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that it is waiting for the launch permission state (YES in S5706), it determines whether or not to end the standby for the launch permission state (S5710). The end of the waiting to the firing permission state is performed when the firing permission waiting time elapses after the waiting to the firing permission state is started, in other words, the value of the firing permission waiting time timer becomes "0". .. Therefore, in step S5710, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines whether or not the value of the firing permission standby time timer is “0”.

When the frame control microcomputer 181 does not end the waiting for the firing permission state, that is, determines that the value of the firing permission waiting time timer is not "0" (NO in S5710), the firing prohibition process (S5206) is terminated as it is. do. On the other hand, when the frame control microcomputer 181 ends the waiting for the firing permission state, that is, when it is determined that the value of the firing permission waiting time timer is "0" (YES in S5710), the waiting for the firing permission state ends. (S5711), the launch permission notification effect for notifying that the launch of the game ball is permitted is executed (S5712), the launch prohibition is terminated (S5714), and the launch prohibition process (S5207) is terminated.

The end of the wait for the launch permission state is performed by turning off the launch permission state standby flag. Further, the end of the firing prohibition is performed by turning off the firing prohibition flag. As a result, in step S5402, it is determined that "launching is not prohibited" (NO in S5402).

Further, the launch permission notification effect is performed by the unit display device 300. Since the frame control board 180 and the unit display device 300 are not directly connected, the frame control board 180 performs a launch permission notification effect requesting execution of a launch permission notification effect for notifying that the launch has been permitted. Set in the output buffer of the frame control RAM 184. The firing permission notification effect request signal set in the output buffer is output to the card unit CU by the output process (S5003). When the launch permission notification effect request signal is input, the card unit CU causes the unit display device 300 to display an image indicating that the launch is permitted as the launch permission notification effect. The specific content of the image indicating that the launch is permitted can be set as appropriate, but the image indicating that the launch is permitted is, for example, the explanatory text "launch" indicating that the launch is permitted. It is now possible. Thank you for your cooperation. "

Next, the game ball approach blocking process (S5207) will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an example of the game ball approach blocking process. As shown in FIG. 59, in the game ball approach blocking process (S5207), the frame control microcomputer 181 first determines whether or not the front door 23 is open (S5801). As described above, the door open detection sensor 23a is configured to be able to detect that the front door 23 is open, and outputs a door open detection signal to the frame control board 180 when the front door 23 is open. Therefore, in step S5801, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines whether or not the front door opening detection signal from the door opening detection sensor 23a is input.

When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the front door 23 is open (YES in S5801), it determines whether or not the approach blocking device 76 is operating (S5802).

Here, the approach blocking device 76 will be described. The approach blocking device 76 includes an operable approach blocking movable portion 76k and a driving unit (not shown) for driving the approach blocking movable portion 76k. The drive unit that drives the approach blocking movable unit 76k is connected to the frame control board 180.

FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an approach blocking device 76. 60 (A) is a view showing a front view of the game board 1, and FIG. 60 (B) is a view showing a sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 60 (A) when the approach blocking device 76 is in the standby state. 60 (C) is a figure showing the cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 60 (A) when the approach blocking apparatus 76 is in an operating state.

As shown in FIGS. 60 (A) to 60 (B), the approach blocking movable portion 76k is a game area 6 side end portion of the launch area 7, in other words, the game area 6 and the launch area 7 in the launch area 7. It is located near the boundary. The approach blocking movable portion 76k is composed of a rectangular flat plate-shaped tongue piece member, and in the standby state, the long side direction is parallel to the direction perpendicular to the launch region 7, and the short side direction and the surface are the launch region 6 of the game ball. The entire long side direction other than the tip is housed behind the launch area 7 so as to be substantially perpendicular to the direction of movement toward the direction and so that the tip is smoothly flush with the launch area 7.

Further, as shown in FIG. 60 (B), the launch area 7 in the game board 1 is divided by the inner rail 63 and the outer rail 62, but the length of the approach blocking movable portion 76k in the short side direction is the launch area. 7 and the cross section perpendicular to the launch direction of the game ball (direction toward the back of the paper), the length is slightly shorter than the distance between the inner rail 63 and the outer rail 62 at the installation position of the entry prevention movable portion 76k. Has been done.

Further, the approach blocking movable portion 76k is configured to be capable of linear motion in the front-rear direction, moves forward when in the operating state, and projects vertically to the launch region 7 as shown in FIG. 60 (C). Be retained. When the approach blocking movable portion 76k is held in the operating state, the game ball launched toward the game area 6 collides with the approach blocking movable portion 76k, so that the entry of the game ball into the game area 6 is blocked. To. In addition, when returning to the standby state to the approach blocking movable portion 76k, it moves toward the rear.

The explanation is returned to the game ball entry prevention process (S5207). When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the approach blocking device 76 is operating (YES in S5802), the frame control microcomputer 181 ends the game ball approach blocking process (S5207) as it is. On the other hand, when the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the approach blocking device 76 is not operating (NO in S5802), the approach blocking device 76 is activated (S5803), and the game ball approach blocking process (S5207) is completed. ..

When the approach blocking device 76 is activated, the approach blocking movable portion 76k in which the tip is flush with the game area 6 and the entire long side direction other than the tip is housed behind the game area 6 is directed forward. It is to move and hold it in a protruding state. Further, in step S5803, the frame control microcomputer 181 turns on the approach blocking device operation flag indicating that the approach blocking device 76 is in the operating state in a predetermined area of the frame control RAM 184. Therefore, in step S5802, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines whether or not the approach blocking device operation flag is ON.

The fact that the approach blocking device 76 is not in operation in step S5802 means that the door opening detection signal has changed from OFF to ON, in other words, the front door 23 has been released from the closed state. Means that. Further, the fact that the approach blocking device 76 is determined to be operating in step S5802 means that the door opening detection signal is continuously turned on, in other words, the front door 23 is continuously opened. ..

When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the front door 23 is not open (NO in S5801), whether or not the approach blocking device 76 is operating, in other words, whether or not the approach blocking device operating flag is ON. It is determined whether or not (S5804). When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the approach blocking device 76 is not in operation, in other words, the approach blocking device operation flag is not ON (NO in S5804), the game ball approach blocking process (S5207) is performed as it is. Finish. On the other hand, when the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the approach blocking device 76 is operating, in other words, the approach blocking device operation flag is ON (YES in S5804), the entry blocking device 76 is put into a standby state. (S5805), the game ball entry prevention process (S5207) is completed.

To put the approach blocking device 76 in the standby state, the approach blocking movable portion 76k held in a state of protruding from the launch area 7 is moved backward, and the tip is flush with the launch area 7. The entire length in the long side direction other than the above is to be stored behind the firing region 7. When the approach blocking device 76 returns to the standby state, the game ball launched into the game area 6 can enter the game area 6. In step S5805, the frame control microcomputer 181 turns off the approach blocking device operation flag.

The fact that the approach blocking device 76 is determined to be operating in step S5804 means that the door opening detection signal has changed from ON to OFF, in other words, the front door 23 has been closed from the open state. Means that. Further, the determination that the approach blocking device 76 is not in operation in step S5804 means that the front door opening detection signal is continuously turned off, in other words, the front door 23 is continuously closed. ..

Next, the electrical configuration on the staging control board 120 side of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described. FIG. 61 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration mainly related to the staging control board 120. As shown in FIG. 61, the staging control board 120 is connected to the upper frame lamp 53U via the driver board 162 for the upper frame lamp, and is connected to the lower frame lamp 53D via the driver board 163 for the lower frame lamp. It is connected to the rotary member motor 55m1 and the elevating member motor 55m2 via the driver board 164 for the movable device, and is connected to the staging button sensor 40a via the staging button relay board 165.

The upper frame lamp 53U, the lower frame lamp 53D, and the effect button 40k are installed on the front door 23, and accordingly, the driver board 162 for the upper frame lamp, the driver board 163 for the lower frame lamp, and the relay for the effect button. The board 165 is also installed at a predetermined position on the front door 23. On the other hand, the board movable body 55k (elevating member 55k2 and the rotating member 55k1) is installed on the game board 1, and the driver board 164 for the board movable device is also installed at a predetermined position on the game board 1 accordingly.

Further, in the first embodiment, the first effect button 40k is configured to be vibrable. Inside the protrusion 34, a motor 40m for the effect button, which is a drive source for vibrating the first effect button 40k, is mounted. The effect button motor 40 m is connected to the effect control board 120 via the effect button relay board 165.

Further, the upper frame lamp driver board 162 is equipped with an input / output port (upper frame lamp input / output port 162a) for inputting / outputting signals. Similarly, the lower frame lamp driver board 163 is also provided with an input / output port (lower frame lamp input / output port 163a) for inputting / outputting signals. Further, the driver board 164 for the panel movable device is also equipped with an input / output port (input / output port 164a for the panel movable device) for inputting / outputting signals. Further, the effect button relay board 165 is also equipped with an input / output port (effect button input / output port 165a) for inputting / outputting signals.

The input / output port 162a for the upper frame lamp, the input / output port 163a for the lower frame lamp, the input / output port 164a for the panel movable device, and the input / output port 165a for the effect button are provided with a large number of pins, and each input / output port is provided. Information (address information) for specifying an address using the pin is set in 162a, 163a, 164a, and 165a. The address information related to each input / output port 162a, 163a, 164a, 165a is composed of the manufacturer identification information composed of the upper 4 bits and the device identification information composed of the lower 3 bits.

The manufacturer identification information is information that identifies the manufacturer (company A in the first embodiment) of the pachinko gaming machine PY1. Therefore, the manufacturer identification information (upper frame lamp manufacturer identification information) set in the upper frame lamp input / output port 162a and the manufacturer identification information (lower frame lamp manufacturer identification information) set in the lower frame lamp input / output port 163a. Information), manufacturer identification information set in the input / output port 164a for the panel movable device (panel movable device manufacturer identification information), and manufacturer identification information set in the effect button input / output port 165a (effect button manufacturer identification). Information) is the same. On the other hand, the device identification information is information that identifies a device (device) in the pachinko gaming machine PY1. Therefore, the device identification information (upper frame lamp device identification information) set in the upper frame lamp input / output port 162a and the device identification information (lower frame lamp device identification information) set in the lower frame lamp input / output port 163a. Information), device identification information (panel movable device device identification information) set in the panel movable device input / output port 164a, and device identification information (effect button device identification) set in the effect button input / output port 165a. Information) is different from each other.

The specific contents of each manufacturer identification information and each device identification information can be appropriately set, but in the first embodiment, the manufacturer identification information associated with the manufacturer (company A) of the pachinko gaming machine PY1. (Upper frame lamp maker identification information, lower frame lamp maker identification information, panel movable device maker identification information, effect button device maker identification information) are set to "1.0.1.0" from the upper side. In the first embodiment, as the manufacturer identification information indicating the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine different from the company A, the manufacturer identification information associated with the company B is "0.0.1.0" from the upper side. The maker identification information associated with the company C is set to "0.0.0.1" from the upper side, and the maker identification information associated with the company D is set to "0.0.1" from the upper side. It is assumed that it is set to "1.0.1". In this way, the manufacturer identification information representing each manufacturer is different from each other.

Further, the upper frame lamp device identification information is set to "0.0.1" from the upper side, the lower frame lamp device identification information is set to "0.1.0" from the upper side, and the panel movable device device identification information is set. Is set to "1.0.0" from the upper side, and the effect button device identification information is set to "0.1.1" from the upper side.

Further, the effect control board 120 is connected to the input / output port 162a for the upper frame lamp, the input / output port 163a for the lower frame lamp, the input / output port 164a for the panel movable device, and the input / output port 165a for the effect button to control the effect. A controller 128 that functions as an interface between the I / O microcomputer 121 and these input / output ports 162a, 163a, 164a, and 165a is mounted. The controller 128 is composed of a microcomputer. Further, the controller 128 is connected to the input / output ports 162a, 163a, 164a, and 165a by a communication cable such as a predetermined harness.

The controller 128 can be connected to the input / output port 162a for the upper frame lamp, the input / output port 163a for the lower frame lamp, the input / output port 164a for the panel movable device, and the input / output port 165a for the effect button by synchronous serial communication. The controller 128 is on the master side, and the input / output port 162a for the upper frame lamp, the input / output port 163a for the lower frame lamp, the input / output port 164a for the panel movable device, and the input / output port 165a for the effect button are on the slave side. It has become. Although detailed description is omitted, a clock is output from the master side to the slave side, and data is transmitted and received by the master side in synchronization with the clock.

The controller 128 has an input / output port 162a for the upper frame lamp, an input / output port 163a for the lower frame lamp, an input / output port 164a for the panel movable device, and an input / output port for the effect button based on the instruction from the effect control microcomputer 121. Data is transmitted to 165a, and the upper frame lamp 53U, the lower frame lamp 53D, the rotary member motor 55m1 (rotary member 55k1), the elevating member motor 55m2 (elevating member 55k2), and the effect button motor 40m. (1st effect button 40k) is activated.

When the upper frame lamp 53U is caused to emit light, the controller 128 includes data including address information related to the upper frame lamp input / output port 162a and information indicating a light emitting mode of the upper frame lamp 53U in the upper frame lamp input / output port 162a. To send. When the driver board 162 for the upper frame lamp receives data including the address specifying information related to the input / output port 162a for the upper frame lamp, the driver board 162 is based on the information indicating the light emission mode of the upper frame lamp 53U included in the data. The upper frame lamp 53U is made to emit light.

When the lower frame lamp 53D is made to emit light, the controller 128 includes data including address information related to the lower frame lamp input / output port 163a and information indicating a light emitting mode of the lower frame lamp 53D in the lower frame lamp input / output port 163a. To send. When the lower frame lamp driver board 163 receives data including address information related to the lower frame lamp input / output port 163a, the lower frame lamp driver board 163 lowers based on the information indicating the light emission mode of the lower frame lamp 53D included in the data. The frame lamp 53D is made to emit light.

When the controller 128 raises and lowers the elevating member 55k2 and rotates the rotating member 55k1, the controller 128 has the input / output port 164a for the panel movable device, the address information related to the input / output port 164a for the panel movable device, and the operation of the elevating member 55k2. Data including information indicating an embodiment (operation mode of the elevating member motor 55m2) and an operation mode of the rotary member 55k1 (operation mode of the rotary member motor 55m1) is transmitted. When the driver board 164 for the panel movable device receives data including the address information related to the input / output port 164a for the panel movable device, the operation mode of the elevating member 55k2 and the operation mode of the rotary member 55k1 included in the data are displayed. Based on the information shown, the elevating member 55k2 (elevating member motor 55m2) and the rotating member 55k1 (rotating member motor 55m1) are operated.

When the controller 128 vibrates the first effect button 40k, the effect information on the effect button input / output port 165a, the address information related to the effect button input / output port 165a, and the operation mode of the first effect button 40k (effect button motor 40 m). Data including information indicating the operation mode of the above) is transmitted. When the effect button relay board 165 receives data including address information related to the effect button input / output port 165a, the operation mode of the first effect button 40k included in the data (operation mode of the effect button motor 40 m). ), The first effect button 40k (effect button motor 40 m) is operated.

When the controller 128 operates the upper frame lamp 53U, the lower frame lamp 53D, the elevating member 55k2 (elevating member motor 55m2), and the rotating member 55k1 (rotating member motor 55m1). When the first effect button 40k (motor for effect button 40 m) is vibrated, data including address information related to various input / output ports 162a, 163a, 164a, 165a is transmitted to various input / output ports 162a, 163a, 164a, 165a. However, in the following, data including address information related to various input / output ports 162a, 163a, 164a, 165a is naturally transmitted to various input / output ports 162a, 163a, 164a, 165a without any particular mention. And.

Further, when the input / output port 162a for the upper frame lamp, the input / output port 163a for the lower frame lamp, the input / output port 164a for the panel movable device, and the input / output port 165a for the effect button each receive data from the controller 128, Send ACK (ACKnowledge) to the controller 128 to give a positive response. The controller 128 has a device (upper frame lamp 53U) corresponding to the input / output port 162a for the upper frame lamp, the input / output port 163a for the lower frame lamp, the input / output port 164a for the panel movable device, and the input / output port 165a for the effect button. , Lower frame lamp 53D, rotary member motor 55m1, elevating member motor 55m2, and effect button motor 41m), whether or not ACK (ACKnowledge) was received from the destination. Is determined. When the controller 128 determines that the ACK from the transmission destination has not been received, the input / output port 162a for the upper frame lamp, the input / output port 163a for the lower frame lamp, the input / output port 164a for the panel movable device, and the effect button. Data indicating that a transmission error has occurred to the input / output port 165a (driver board transmission error data) is transmitted to the effect CPU 122. The driver board transmission error signal only indicates that a transmission error has occurred to any of the input / output ports 162a, 163a, 164a, and 165a, and does not indicate the type of the input / output port in which the transmission error has occurred. Further, when the driver board transmission error data is transmitted to the effecting CPU 122, the controller 128 has input / output ports 162a, 163a, 164a in which a transmission error has occurred in a register (not shown) provided inside the controller 128. The data indicating 165a is stored.

In the first embodiment, the speaker 52 is connected to the image CPU 141 via the voice control circuit 161 and the voice is controlled by the image CPU 141. Further, the data related to the sound is stored in the image ROM 142. Further, the staging control board 120 is equipped with an RTC (Real Time Clock) 129 capable of measuring time.

Next, the staging control main process according to the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing an example of the staging control main process according to the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 62, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs an operation confirmation process (S4002) related to various effect devices after the power-on process (S4001) and before the interrupt prohibition (S4003). Although the step numbers are different from the basic embodiments for the interrupt prohibition in step S4003, the random number seed update process in step S4004, the command transmission process in step S4005, and the interrupt enable in step S4006, the control content is basic. It is the same as the embodiment.

Here, the operation confirmation process (S4002) will be described with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation confirmation process. As shown in FIG. 63, in the operation confirmation process, the staging control microcomputer 121 first starts measuring the operation confirmation normal determination time in step S4051. The operation confirmation normal judgment time is determined by various operable effect devices (image display device 50, speaker 52, frame lamp 53 (upper frame lamp 53U, lower frame lamp 53D), panel movable device 55, first effect button device 40). As a result of performing the operation confirmation, it is a time for determining that the operation is normal, and is composed of the elapsed time from the start of the operation confirmation process. The specific time for determining the normality of operation confirmation can be appropriately set, but in the first embodiment, it is set to 60 seconds.

Since the 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4011) described in the basic embodiment has not yet been executed when the operation check process (S4002) is being performed, the timer included in the 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4011) has not been executed yet. Since the update process (S4104) has not been executed yet, the effect control microcomputer 121 appropriately measures the operation check normality determination time based on the RTC129.

After starting the measurement of the operation confirmation normal judgment time, the effect control microcomputer 121 has various effect devices (image display device 50, speaker 52, frame lamp 53 (upper frame lamp 53U, lower frame lamp 53D), and panel movable device. 55, the operation check according to the first effect button device 40) is sequentially executed (S4052 to S4057).

In step S4052, the staging control microcomputer 121 issues a command (image / audio operation confirmation start command) indicating the content of the operation confirmation in order to confirm the operation of the image display device 50 and the speaker 52 (image / audio operation confirmation). It is transmitted to the image control board 140.

When the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 receives the image / audio operation confirmation start command, the operation confirmation image (moving image) configured in the VDP 144 for a predetermined time (30 seconds) based on the image / audio operation confirmation start command. ) Is appropriately displayed on the display unit 50a. Further, when the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 receives the image / sound operation confirmation start command, the image CPU 141 voices the operation confirmation sound composed of a predetermined time (30 seconds) based on the image / sound operation confirmation start command. Output is appropriately output from the speaker 52 via the control circuit 161.

In step S4053, the staging control controller 121 has a command (panel) indicating the content of the operation check in order to confirm the operation (check the operation of the movable panel) of the panel movable device 55 (elevating member 55k2 and rotating member 55k1). The movable body operation check start command) is sent to the controller 128.

When the controller 128 receives the board movable body operation confirmation start command, the controller 128 of the lifting member 55k2 for operation confirmation and the rotating member 55k1 configured for a predetermined time (15 seconds) based on the board movable body operation confirmation start command. The operation is appropriately executed by the panel movable device 55 (motor for elevating member 55m2 and motor for rotating member 55m1).

In step S4054, the staging control controller 121 has a command (frame) indicating the content of the operation check in order to check the operation (frame lamp operation check) of the frame lamp 53 (upper frame lamp 53U and lower frame lamp 53D). The lamp operation check start command) is sent to the controller 128.

When the controller 128 receives the frame lamp operation check start command, the controller 128 appropriately emits light for operation check, which is composed of a predetermined time (20 seconds), based on the frame lamp operation check start command, and the frame lamp 53 (upper frame lamp). 53U, and lower frame lamp 53D) to execute. Specifically, the controller 128 first causes the upper frame lamp 53U to emit light in a predetermined operation confirmation light emitting mode, and then causes the lower frame lamp 53D to emit light in a predetermined operation confirmation light emitting mode.

In step S4055, the effect control controller 121 has a command (effect button operation) indicating the content of the operation check in order to confirm the operation (effect button operation check) of the first effect button device 40 (first effect button 40k). Confirmation start command) is sent to the controller 128.

When the controller 128 receives the effect button operation check start command, the controller 128 appropriately vibrates the first effect button 40k for operation check, which is composed of a predetermined time (10 seconds), based on the effect button operation check start command. 1 The effect button device 40 is made to execute.

In the slow chart of the operation confirmation process, it seems that the image / audio operation confirmation, the panel movable body operation confirmation, the frame lamp operation confirmation, and the effect button operation confirmation are performed in sequence, but this is the start timing in this order. It's just done in, and it's actually started and running almost at the same time.

After completing various operation checks, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines in step S4056 whether or not the operation check normal determination time has elapsed. When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the operation confirmation normal determination time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S4056. That is, the effect control microcomputer 121 repeats the step S4056 until it is determined that the operation confirmation normal determination time has elapsed. On the other hand, when the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the operation confirmation normal determination time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S4057.

Here, as described above, when the controller 128 causes the upper frame lamp 53U and the lower frame lamp 53D to emit light, when the panel movable body 55k (rotating member 55k1, elevating member 55k2) is operated, and the first effect button. When the 40k is vibrated, the input / output port 162a for the upper frame lamp, the input / output port 163a for the lower frame lamp, the input / output port 164a for the panel movable device, and the input / output port 165a for the effect button each input data from the controller 128. When it is received, ACK is transmitted to the controller 128, but if the controller 128 does not receive the ACK, the upper frame lamp 53U and the lower frame lamp 53D corresponding to the input / output ports 162a, 163a, 164a, and 165a are movable. The body 55k (rotating member 55k1, elevating member 55k2) and the first effect button 40k are not operating. Then, the data for causing the controller 128 to emit light of the upper frame lamp 53U, the data for causing the lower frame lamp 53D to emit light, the data for operating the panel movable body 55k (rotating member 55k1, elevating member 55k2), and the first. 1 When data for vibrating the effect button 40k is transmitted but ACK is not received for the transmission, data indicating that ACK from the input / output port is not received is mounted on the controller 128. Store in the register.

Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 121 confirms the controller 128 in step S4057, and confirms the operation of the panel movable body, the frame lamp operation, and the effect button operation with respect to the panel movable body 55k (rotating member 55k1, elevating member 55k2). ), The upper frame lamp 53U, the lower frame lamp 53D, and the first effect button 40k are determined whether or not there is an error (operation abnormality error) in which the first effect button 40k cannot be operated. When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that there is no operation abnormality error, the effect control microcomputer 121 ends the operation check process and returns to the effect control main process. On the other hand, if the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that there is an operation abnormality error, the process proceeds to step S4058.

The effect control microcomputer 121 determines in step S4058 whether or not there is a frame nonconformity error. The frame nonconformity error means that the combination of the front door 23 with respect to the game board 1 is non-conformity, that is, the game board 1 and the front door 23 are not aligned. Data indicating that ACK is not received from all of the input / output port 162a for the upper frame lamp, the input / output port 163a for the lower frame lamp, and the input / output port 165a for the effect button installed in the front door 23 is stored. If the data indicating that the ACK from the input / output port 164a for the board movable device installed in the game board 1 is not received is not stored, the frame mismatch error is determined.

If ACK is not received from any part of the input / output port 162a for the upper frame lamp, the input / output port 163a for the lower frame lamp, and the input / output port 165a for the effect button, the input / output port is damaged or failed. Although it is considered that the data is received, the input / output port 162a for the upper frame lamp, the input / output port 163a for the lower frame lamp, and the effect are received even though the ACK from the input / output port 164a for the panel movable device is received. When ACK is not received from all of the button input / output ports 165a, the manufacturer identification information set in the input / output ports 162a, 163a, 165a is included in the data transmitted from the controller 128. It is considered that they do not match. This means that the front door 23 attached to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is likely to be from another manufacturer.

When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines in step S4058 that the frame nonconformity error occurs, in step S4059, the frame nonconformity error notification for notifying that the frame nonconformity error has occurred is performed. The effect mode of the frame nonconformity error notification can be appropriately set, but in the first embodiment, it is configured by displaying an image (frame nonconformity error notification image) indicating that a frame nonconformity error has occurred in the display unit 50a. ing. The specific display content of the frame nonconformity error notification image can be appropriately set within a range in which the clerk of the game store can recognize that the frame nonconformity error has occurred, but in the first embodiment, the frame nonconformity error occurs. It is composed of the explanation "The front door may not match. Please check."

In step S4059, the effect control microcomputer 121 transmits a command (frame nonconformity error notification start command) indicating the effect content of the frame nonconformity error notification to the image control board 140. When the image control board 140 receives the frame nonconformity error notification start command, the image control board 140 executes the frame nonconformity error notification based on the frame nonconformity error notification start command. In the first embodiment, the image control board 140 displays a frame nonconformity error notification image (explanatory text "the front door may not match. Please check.") On the display unit 50a. If some image is displayed on the display unit 50a at the timing when the frame nonconformity error notification is started, even if the frame nonconformity error notification image is displayed superimposed on the image, it is erased on the image and the frame nonconformity is displayed. An error notification image may be displayed.

Further, when the effect control microcomputer 121 determines in step S4058 that the error is not a frame mismatch error, in step S4060, the operation abnormality error notification according to the type of the input / output port to which the ACK is not transmitted is notified. The effect mode of the operation abnormality error notification can be appropriately set, but in the first embodiment, the display unit 50a is configured to display an image (operation abnormality error notification image) indicating that an operation abnormality error has occurred. ing.

The specific display contents of the operation abnormality error notification are appropriately set within a range in which the clerk of the amusement shop can recognize that an operation abnormality error has occurred according to the type of the input / output port to which ACK is not transmitted. Although it is possible, in the first embodiment, it is composed of an explanatory text indicating that an operation abnormality error has occurred according to the type of the input / output port to which ACK has not been transmitted. For example, the explanation when ACK is not transmitted only from the input / output port 162a for the upper frame lamp is composed of "The upper frame lamp relationship is abnormal. Please check.", And the input / output port for the lower frame lamp. The explanation when ACK is not transmitted only from 163a is composed of "The lower frame lamp relationship is abnormal. Please check." When ACK is not transmitted only from the input / output port 165a for the effect button. The explanation of is composed of "The effect button relationship is abnormal. Please check." In addition, the explanation when ACK is not transmitted from the input / output port 162a for the upper frame lamp and the input / output port 163a for the lower frame lamp is "The relationship between the upper frame lamp and the lower frame lamp is abnormal. If ACK is not transmitted from the input / output port 163a for the lower frame lamp and the input / output port 165a for the effect button, the explanation is "The relationship between the lower frame lamp and the effect button is abnormal." The explanation when ACK is not transmitted from the input / output port 165a for the effect button and the input / output port 162a for the upper frame lamp is composed of "Please check." It is abnormal. Please check. "

In step S4060, the effect control microcomputer 121 transmits a command (operation abnormality error notification start command) indicating the effect content of the operation abnormality error notification to the image control board 140. When the image control board 140 receives the operation abnormality error notification start command, the image control board 140 executes the operation abnormality error notification based on the operation abnormality error notification start command.

The effect control microcomputer 121 does not proceed to any process after step S4059 and step S4060, and does not proceed to the effect control main process. Therefore, it is not possible to perform the effect according to the game by the effect control board 120. This is to prevent the effect according to the game from being executed in the state where the error related to the effect is generated. Therefore, after this, for example, when the error is resolved by a clerk of a game store and the power is turned on again, it is determined in step S4057 that there is no operation abnormality error, the process proceeds to the staging control main process, and the game is performed. The production becomes feasible. Further, the frame nonconformity error notification and the operation abnormality error notification shall be continuously executed after being started until the power is cut off. However, both the frame nonconformity error notification and the operation abnormality error notification are terminated when the first effect button 40k is operated, even if they are terminated after a predetermined time has elapsed after the start. Is also good.

As described above, according to the pachinko game machine PY1, the frame control board 180 (control means) capable of executing control (predetermined control) related to the game ball and the frame control RAM 184 (storage means) capable of storing predetermined data. The frame control RAM 184 (storage means) includes a ball holding number storage unit 185 (first storage unit) and a frame control side holding ball number BU unit 186 (second storage unit). The storage unit 185 stores data representing the number of balls held (specific matter) as the number of balls master data (main data), and the frame control side number of balls held BU unit 186 is data representing the number of balls held (specific matters). Is stored in three (multiple) as BU data (sub data) of the number of balls held on the frame control side, and the frame control board 180 does not match the check sums related to the frame control RAM 184, and the frame control RAM 184 is abnormal. If it is determined that all three frame control side ball holding number BU data match (predetermined condition is satisfied), and if it is determined that all match, the three frame control Based on the side-held ball number BU data, the possessed ball number master data is newly generated and stored in the possessed ball number storage unit 185. The checksums related to the frame control RAM 184 do not match, but the fact that all three frame control side ball number BU data match means that the frame control side ball number BU unit 186 is kept normal. There is a high possibility that it is. Then, when an abnormality occurs in any of the frame control RAM 184 that stores the data representing the number of balls by newly generating the master data of the number of balls held using the frame control side BU data of the number of balls held. Even if there is, it is possible to generate data representing the number of balls held and prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage.

Further, does the frame control board 180 match the checksums related to the frame control RAM 184 in the power-on processing (S5001) of the frame control main process performed when power is supplied to the frame control board 180? Whether or not, in other words, whether or not the frame control RAM 184 is abnormal is determined, so that it is possible to suppress the expansion of the disadvantage suffered by the player. Further, since it is possible to secure data representing the number of game balls that can be used in the game, that is, the number of balls held, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage. Further, since it is a condition for newly generating the ball number master data that all the ball number BU data on the frame control side match, the reliability of the ball number master data can be improved.

The pachinko game machine PY1 has a frame control board 180 (specific control means) that controls the number of balls (predetermined items) that can change according to the progress of the game, and a game control board 100 (non-specific) that is different from the frame control board 180. The frame control board 180 includes a ball holding number storage unit 185 (specific storage unit) for storing the ball holding number master data (first data) representing the number of balls held, and the game control board 100. Has a game control side number of balls BU unit 106 (non-specific storage unit) that stores game control side number of balls BU data (second data) representing the number of balls possessed, and the frame control board 180 has a number of balls possessed. By updating the number master data (predetermined condition is satisfied), a command for specifying the number of balls (third data) representing the number of balls represented by the number of balls master data is transmitted to the game control board 100, and the game control board is used. Upon receiving the ball holding number designation command, 100 updates the game control side holding ball number BU data stored in the game control side holding ball number BU unit 106 based on the holding ball number designation command. Therefore, the game control board 100 can also store data representing the number of balls held, and can prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage.

Further, when the frame control board 180 determines that the frame control RAM 184 is abnormal because the checksums related to the frame control RAM 184 do not match, the frame control side ball number master data is based on the game control side ball possession number BU data. May be newly generated and stored in the ball number storage unit 185. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage. Further, does the frame control board 180 match the checksums related to the frame control RAM 184 in the power-on processing (S5001) of the frame control main process performed when power is supplied to the frame control board 180? Whether or not, in other words, whether or not the frame control RAM 184 is abnormal is determined, and if it is abnormal, the ball holding number data request command is immediately transmitted to the game control board 100, so that there is a disadvantage suffered by the player. It is possible to suppress the expansion. Further, the frame control board 180 can update the number of balls master data stored in the number of balls storage unit 185 according to the progress of the game, and as a condition for transmitting the update to specify the number of balls. Therefore, the reliability of the number of balls held BU data on the game control side can be improved.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 has a frame control board 180 (specific control means) for controlling the number of balls held (the number of game media that the player can use in the game) and an image display device 50 (display means). The frame control board 180 has a frame control RAM 184 (specific storage unit) for storing the ball holding number master data indicating the number of balls held, and the frame control board 180 has a check sum related to the frame control RAM 184. It may be determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the frame control RAM 184 due to non-matching, and when the image display device 50 (display means) determines that an abnormality has occurred in the frame control RAM 184 by the frame control board 180. , The number of balls held can be displayed. Therefore, even if an abnormality occurs in the frame control RAM 184, the clerk of the game store, the player, or the like can check the number of balls held, so that the player can be prevented from suffering a disadvantage.

Further, since the image display device 50 displays the number of balls held on condition that the first effect button 40k (operation means) is pressed and held (predetermined operation), the number of balls held should be displayed only when necessary. And the convenience is improved. Further, since it is possible to accept a long press (predetermined operation) of the first effect button 40k (operation means) during the period when the game is not performed (predetermined period), the game is hindered and the player's willingness to play the game. Can be prevented from declining. Further, since the image display device 50 displays the number of balls held based on the game control side ball number BU data updated according to the progress of the game, the reliability of the number of balls held on the image display device 50 is reliable. It can enhance the sex.

Further, according to the pachinko game machine PY1, a frame control board 180 (specific control means) that controls the number of balls held (the number of game media that the player can use in the game) and a ball number display device 301 (display). The frame control board 180 has a frame control RAM 184 (specific storage unit) for storing the number of balls master data (first number data) representing the number of balls, and the number of balls display device 301. Has a display device-side number of balls BU unit 301d (non-specific storage unit) that stores BU data (second number data) of the number of balls held on the display device side representing the number of balls held, and the number of balls held display device 301 , The number of balls held on the display device side The number of balls held on the display device side BU data stored in the BU unit 301d can be displayed. Therefore, even if an abnormality occurs in the frame control RAM 184, the clerk of the game store, the player, or the like can check the number of balls held, so that the player can be prevented from suffering a disadvantage.

Further, the frame control board 180 has a ball holding number update designation signal (specific data) representing the holding ball number represented by the holding ball number master data by updating the holding ball number master data (predetermined condition is satisfied). When the ball number display device 301 is transmitted and the ball number update designation signal is input, the ball number display device 301 stores in the display device side ball number BU unit 301d based on the ball number update designation signal. The number of balls held on the display device side BU data is updated. The reliability of the number of balls held BU data on the display device side can be improved. In addition, the number of balls held master data can be updated according to the progress of the game, and since the update is a condition for outputting the designated signal for updating the number of balls, the reliability of the number of balls held BU data on the display device side is improved. Can be enhanced.

Further, as described above, the discharge ball detection sensor 310a depends on the case where the steel game ball to which the magnet is attached passes through the discharge ball detection sensor 310a and the case where the stainless steel game ball passes through the discharge ball detection sensor 310a. The detection time (discharge ball detection time) is different. Specifically, the ejection ball detection time is longer when the steel game ball to which the magnet is attached passes through the ejection ball detection sensor 310a. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 is basically a gaming machine that plays a game by flowing a stainless steel gaming ball into the gaming area 6, a steel gaming ball that sticks to a magnet, and a stainless steel gaming machine. A discharge ball detection sensor 310a (detection sensor) for detecting a ball and a frame control board 180 are provided, and the discharge ball detection sensor 310a detects a steel game ball that sticks to a magnet and a stainless steel game ball. Is output toward the frame control board 180, and the frame control board 180 measures the time during which the discharge ball detection signal is input when the discharge ball detection signal is input. Therefore, it can be recognized that the steel game ball to which the magnet is attached is discharged as a discharge ball to the outside of the game area 6. In addition, the frame control board 180 is illegally notified (indicating that a steel game ball sticking to a magnet is detected when the time during which the ejection ball detection signal is input is longer than the illegally specified time (12 ms). Since the specific notification) is performed, it is possible to make the game store aware that the steel game ball that sticks to the magnet is mixed. Further, since the discharge ball detection sensor 310a is installed in the collection passage formed outside the game area 6 where the game ball that has entered the game area 6 can be collected and passed through, the steel game ball that sticks to the magnet. Performance to detect is improved.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is a gaming machine in which a gaming area 6 through which the launched game ball can flow down and a launching area 7 through which the launched game ball can pass toward the gaming area 6 are formed. The launch area 7 is provided with an approach blocking movable portion 76k (movable portion) that can be switched between a standby state and an operating state, and the approach blocking movable portion 76k moves toward the gaming area 6 in the standby state. The ball is passed, and the gaming ball moving toward the gaming area 6 is not passed in the operating state. Therefore, when the front door 23 is open, it is possible to prevent the gaming ball from entering the gaming area 6 and rolling around, causing the gaming ball to jump out of the pachinko gaming machine PY1. can.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 further includes a launching device 72 (launching means) for launching a game ball, and the launching device 72 and the approach blocking movable portion 76k are directed toward the launching device 72 from the game area 6 side. Since a foul ball collection port (collection port) for collecting the moving game ball as a foul ball is formed, the entry blocking movable portion 76k blocks the entry into the game area 6 and moves toward the launching device 72. (Return) The game ball can be collected as a foul ball as it is. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the gaming ball from jumping out of the pachinko gaming machine PY1. Further, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 includes a frame-shaped inner frame 22 and a gaming board 1 in which a game area 6 is formed and fitted into an opening 1A (fitting hole) formed in the inner frame. The launching device 72 is installed in the inner frame 22, the launching device 72 is formed over the inner frame 22 and the game board 1, and the approach blocking movable portion 76k is a portion formed in the inner frame 22 of the launching region 7. It is arranged near the boundary between the inner frame 22 and the game board 1. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the gaming ball from jumping out of the pachinko gaming machine PY1. Further, a front door 23 that is openably and closably supported by the inner frame 22 on the front side of the game area 6 and the launch area 7 is further provided, and the approach blocking movable portion 76k responds to the opening of the front door 23. It switches from the standby state to the operating state. Therefore, it is possible to further prevent the gaming ball from jumping out of the pachinko gaming machine PY1.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 has a front door 23 that can be opened and closed on the front side of the game area 6 where the launched game ball can flow down, and a door opening detection sensor that detects that the front door 23 has been opened. A gaming machine equipped with a 23a (detection means) that allows a game ball to enter the gaming area 6 when the opening of the front door 23 is not detected by the door opening detection sensor 23a, and the door opening detection sensor. When the opening of the front door 23 is detected by the 23a, the game ball is prevented from entering the game area 6. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gaming ball from jumping out of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 when the front door 23 is open.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1, a launch area 7 through which the game ball can pass toward the game area 6 is formed on the downstream side of the game area 6 with respect to the launch of the game ball, and the door open detection sensor 23a forms a launch area 7. When the opening of the front door 23 is not detected, the game ball moving toward the game area 6 in the launch area can enter the game area 6, and the door opening detection sensor 23a opens the front door 23. When detected, the game ball moving toward the game area 6 in the launch area 7 is prevented from entering the game area 6. Therefore, when the front door 23 is open, it is possible to further prevent the gaming ball from jumping out of the pachinko gaming machine PY1. Further, in the launch area 7, the approach blocking movable portion 76k that can be switched between a standby state in which the game ball moving toward the game area 6 is passed and an operating state in which the game ball moving toward the game area 6 is not passed. The approach blocking movable portion 76k is normally held in the standby state, and when the door opening detection sensor 23a detects the opening of the front door 23, the pachinko machine is switched from the standby state to the operating state. It is possible to more reliably prevent the gaming machine PY1 from jumping out to the outside.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is a gaming machine provided with a front door 23 that can be opened and closed on the front side of the gaming area 6 where the launched game ball can flow down, and the front door 23 has the front door 23. A lock 302 capable of holding the closure of the door 23 and releasing the closure is provided, an unlock detection sensor 302a (detection means) for detecting the release of the closure by the lock 302 is provided, and an unlock detection sensor 302a is provided. Allows the game ball to be launched when the release of the closure is not detected by the unlocking detection sensor 302a, and blocks the launch of the game ball when the release of the closure is detected by the unlocking detection sensor 302a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gaming ball from jumping out of the pachinko gaming machine PY1. Further, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 further includes a launching device 72 (launching means) capable of executing an operation of launching a gaming ball, and when the unlocking detection sensor 302a does not detect the release of the closure, the launching device 72 plays a game. The operation of launching the ball is held in an executable state, and when the unlocking detection sensor 302a detects the release of the closure, the launching device 72 is held in an infeasible state of launching the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent the gaming ball from jumping out of the pachinko gaming machine PY1.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 has an input / output port having a plurality of terminals (input / output port 162a for upper frame lamp, input / output port 163a for lower frame lamp, input / output port 164a for panel movable device, input for effect button). A gaming machine equipped with a board (upper frame lamp driver board 162, lower frame lamp driver board 163, effect button relay board 165) on which an output port 165a) is mounted, and is one of a plurality of terminals. An address related to the input / output port is set by a plurality of terminals of the unit, and the address includes specific unique information (manufacturer identification information) representing a predetermined attribute. Therefore, by specifying the attributes of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 using the board on which the input / output port is mounted, it is possible to check whether or not the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is fraudulent. Can be prevented from suffering a disadvantage. Moreover, since the predetermined attribute is the company that manufactured the pachinko gaming machine PY1, the manufacturing company also has an advantage that the development can be easily performed.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 further includes a game board 1, a front door 23 that is openable and closable to the game board 1, and a staging control board 120 (control means), and is further provided with a board (driver for upper frame lamp). The board 162, the driver board 163 for the lower frame lamp, and the relay board 165 for the effect button are installed on the front door 23, the effect control board 120 is installed on the game board 1, and the effect control board 120 represents a predetermined attribute. When the basic unique information (manufacturer identification information) is stored and the predetermined attribute represented by the basic unique information is different from the predetermined attribute represented by the specific unique information, the staging control board 120 includes the game board 1 and the front door 23. It is possible to execute a specific notification (frame nonconformity error notification) that suggests that the above is not consistent (the combination of the front door 23 with respect to the game board 1 is incompatible). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a problem that the front door 23 on which the staging device is mounted is mistakenly attached to the game board 1. This is particularly effective when, for example, the manufacturers of the game board 1 are various, but the makers of the front door 23 are different from the makers of the game board 1 and are in common. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1, a plurality of boards (driver board 162 for upper frame lamp, driver board 163 for lower frame lamp, relay board 165 for effect button) are mounted, and specific unique information and specific unique information are used in the address. Since the individual information (device identification information) associated with the board is included, the boards can be easily identified from each other by the address.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 has a launching device (launching device 72) for launching a gaming ball, control regarding launching the gaming ball by the launching device, and predetermined items other than the launching of the gaming ball (number of balls held, fraudulent notification, etc.). The control means is provided with a control means (frame control board 180) for controlling the above-mentioned, and the control means can execute the unit control (unit launch control) related to the launch of one game ball in a predetermined cycle (600 msec). The unit control is composed of the launch of the gaming ball and the launch standby in which the gaming ball is not launched until the next launch of the gaming ball after the launch. Therefore, the control means for controlling the launch of the game ball is generalized, the space for the control means for launching the game ball can be saved, the cost can be suppressed, and the number of launch balls per unit time can be reduced. Can be adjusted appropriately. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1, depending on the end of the unit control, a launch delay (launch cycle change control) in which the game ball is not launched separately from the launch standby may be executed. It is possible to adjust the number of shots of the pachinko balls more appropriately. Moreover, since the time related to the launch delay (launch cycle change control) is shorter than the time related to the predetermined cycle related to the unit control, the number of game balls fired per unit time is reduced, and the game store side suffers a disadvantage. Can be prevented.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1, control can be executed at a predetermined minimum time interval (every 4 msec), and the time (4 msec) related to the launch delay (launch cycle change control) and the predetermined cycle related to the unit control can be set. Since the time (600 msec) can be divided by the time interval (minimum time interval) of the control, it becomes easy to control the launch of the game ball by the frame control board 180.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1, the frame control board 180 can periodically (every 2404 ms) execute specific control (unit launch control) relating to the launch of a plurality of game balls, and at least in each specific control. The unit control of two or more first times (4 times) and the second number of times (1 times) of firing delay (fire cycle change control) are included. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate control by the frame control board 180 to appropriately control the number of game balls fired per unit time. Further, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 further includes an operating means (launching handle 72k) capable of accepting a specific operation (rotational operation) for launching the gaming ball, and the launching device launches the gaming ball according to the specific operation received by the operating means. The control means can periodically execute the specific control on condition that the specific operation is accepted. Therefore, even when the player performs an operation related to firing, the number of firing balls per unit time can be easily and appropriately adjusted.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 includes a launching device 72 for launching a game ball, and a frame control board 180 (control means) for controlling predetermined items including launching the game ball by the launching device 72, and a frame control board. The 180 can execute control at intervals of 4 msec (predetermined time interval), and 4 (n) in 600 msec (first specific period) obtained by multiplying 4 msec by 150 (first integer of 2 or more). ) Unit launch control (specific unit launch control) that launches the game ball to the launcher 72 is possible, and between one unit launch control and the next unit launch control, 1 (1 or more) in 4 msec. 4 msec (second specific period) multiplied by (the second integer of). Therefore, the number of game balls fired per unit time can be appropriately adjusted by the control by the frame control board 180.

(Example of modification of the first embodiment)
Next, a modified example of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first embodiment will be described. It is also possible to appropriately combine the modification examples described below.

In the first embodiment, the frame control side timer interrupt process (S5005) is executed in a cycle of 4 ms, but the time related to this cycle is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate. Therefore, even if the frame control side timer interrupt process (S5005) is executed in a cycle shorter than the 4 ms cycle such as a 1 ms cycle or a 2 ms cycle, it is more than a 4 ms cycle such as a 6 ms cycle or a 10 ms cycle. It may be executed in a long cycle. Further, regarding the control related to the launch of the game ball according to the first embodiment, specifically, the unit launch control and the unit launch control may be appropriately changed. Further, the number of game balls fired per unit time may be appropriately changed.

For example, when the frame control side timer interrupt process is performed in a cycle of 4 msec, unit launch control is performed to launch one game ball in 600 msec, unit launch control is configured by one unit launch control, and unit launch is performed. The time interval between controls may be set to 4 msec, and the number of game balls fired per unit time may be about 99.338. In addition, when the frame control side timer interrupt process is performed in a cycle of 4 msec, unit launch control for launching one game ball in 600 ms is performed, and unit launch control is configured with 16 unit launch controls. In the launch control, a time zone that does not constitute the unit launch control is secured for 12 msec, in other words, the launch delay (launch cycle change control) after the unit launch control is performed three times, and the game ball is launched per unit time. The number may be about 99.875. In this case, the allocation related to the three firing delays (launch cycle change control) in the unit firing control may be appropriately set. For example, one firing delay (launch cycle change control) is performed for the 5th unit firing control, the 10th unit firing control, and the 16th unit firing control, and the firing delay (launch cycle change control) is performed in the unit firing control. ) May be arranged as evenly as possible. Alternatively, three firing delays (firing cycle change control) may be continuously performed in the 16th unit firing control, and the firing delays (launch cycle change control) may be collectively arranged in the unit firing control. ..

In addition, the frame control side timer interrupt processing is performed in a cycle of 2 msec, unit launch control is performed to launch one game ball in 600 ms, and unit launch control is configured by two unit launch controls, between unit launch controls. The time interval may be set to 2 msec, and the number of game balls fired per unit time may be about 99.834. In addition, the frame control side timer interrupt process is performed in a cycle of 2 msec, unit launch control is performed to launch one game ball in 600 ms, and unit launch control is configured by unit launch control of 8 times, and the unit launch control is performed. In, a time zone that does not constitute unit firing control is secured for 6 msec, in other words, the firing delay (fire cycle change control) after the unit firing control is performed three times, and the number of game balls fired per unit time is increased. It may be about 99.875. In this case, the allocation related to the three firing delays (launch cycle change control) in the unit firing control may be appropriately set. For example, one firing delay (launch cycle change control) is performed for the second unit firing control, the fifth unit firing control, and the eighth unit firing control, and the firing delay (launch cycle change control) is performed in the unit firing control. ) May be arranged as evenly as possible. Alternatively, three firing delays (firing cycle change control) may be continuously performed in the eighth unit firing control, and the firing delays (launch cycle change control) may be collectively arranged in the unit firing control. ..

Further, in the first embodiment, in the frame control board 180, the frame control side holding number BU unit 186 is formed in the frame control RAM 184 including the holding ball number storage unit 185, but the frame control RAM 184 It may be formed in another storage device (part, electronic medium). Further, in the first embodiment, the frame control side number of balls BU unit 186 has a first number of balls BU region 186a, a second number of balls BU region 186b, and a third number of balls BU region 186c. The backup data representing the number of balls held is stored, but the number of backup data representing the number of balls held is not limited to three and may be appropriately changed.

Further, in the first embodiment, the number of balls held by the first frame control side ball number BU data, the number of balls held by the second frame control side ball number BU data, and the number of balls held by the third frame control side BU When all the numbers of balls represented by the data match, it is determined that the backup data representing the number of balls held in the frame control board 180 is normal, but this is the criterion for determining whether or not the data is normal. It is not limited to this, and may be changed as appropriate. For example, if the backup data indicating the number of balls held on the frame control board 180 matches at a predetermined ratio of half or more, or two-thirds or more, or more than half of the number of balls held, the number of balls held on the frame control board 180. It may be determined that the backup data representing the above is normal. In this case, the number of balls that match at a predetermined ratio of half or more may be restored as the number of balls master data (newly stored in the number of balls storage unit 185).

Further, in the first embodiment, when it is determined that the check sum values do not match, in other words, an abnormality has occurred in the frame control RAM 184 in the power-on processing (S5001) of the frame control main process, the frame control side possession The number of balls held master data is restored using the number of balls BU data (newly stored in the number of balls storage unit 185), but the frame control board 180 is provided with the number of balls held BU unit 186 on the frame control side. The number of balls held on the frame control side is not stored, and the number of balls held on the game control side is mastered by using either or both of the BU data on the number of balls held on the game control side and the BU data on the number of balls held on the display device side from the beginning. The data may be restored (newly stored in the ball holding number storage unit 185). When either one is used, the number of balls represented by the number of balls BU data may be restored as the number of balls master data (newly stored in the number of balls storage unit 185). On the other hand, when both are used, it is determined whether or not the number of balls held by the game control side BU data and the number of balls held by the display device side BU data match, and it is determined that they match. Then, assuming that those values are normal, the matching number of balls may be restored as the number of balls master data (newly stored in the number of balls storage unit 185).

Further, in the first embodiment, the number of balls held by the first frame control side ball number BU data, the number of balls held by the second frame control side ball number BU data, and the number of balls held by the third frame control side BU If all the numbers of balls represented by the data do not match and it is determined that the number of balls held on the frame control side BU unit 186 is abnormal, the game is not performed and the first effect button 40k is the first. When the condition of receiving one specific operation (for example, a long press operation for 5 seconds) is satisfied, the number of balls held is displayed on the display unit 50a. However, this condition can be changed as appropriate. For example, when the game is not being played, a menu screen showing various settings such as volume and light intensity is displayed, which includes a menu for specifying the number of balls to be held, and the menu is selected. The number of balls held may be displayed on the display unit 50a on condition that the operation is performed. Further, regardless of whether or not the first effect button 40k is operated, the number of balls held may be displayed on the display unit 50a on condition that the game is not performed. Alternatively, the number of balls held may be displayed on the display unit 50a on condition that the first effect button 40k receives the first specific operation regardless of whether or not the game is executed. Further, the content of the first specific operation may be changed as appropriate.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the number of balls held is displayed on the display unit 50a, the first effect button 40k is displayed by receiving a second specific operation (for example, a normal one-time pressing operation). Although the number of balls held is erased in the unit 50a, the content of the second specific operation may be changed as appropriate. Alternatively, after the number of balls held is displayed on the display unit 50a, the number of balls held is erased when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the display regardless of whether or not the first effect button 40k is operated. You may do so. Further, the number of balls held may be continuously displayed until the game is started.

Further, in the first embodiment, the possessed ball number display device 301 displays the possessed ball number on the possessed ball number display 301b when the possessed ball number display button 301k is operated, but the possessed ball number display button 301k is displayed. It is not installed, and after the power is supplied, the number of balls held may be continuously displayed.

Further, in the first embodiment, the frame control side ball number BU data, the game control side ball number BU data, and the display device side ball number BU data are also updated according to the update of the ball number master data. Although it is updated, the update timing may be changed as appropriate. For example, every time the frame control side timer interrupt process is performed, the frame control side ball number backup process, the game control side ball number backup process, and the display device side backup process are executed, and various ball possession number BU data are updated. It may be done.

Further, in the first embodiment, a steel game ball that sticks to the magnet is mixed based on the discharge ball detection signal from the discharge ball detection sensor 310a installed in the recovery passage formed outside the game area 6. Although it is determined whether or not it is present, the installation position of the detection sensor for determining whether or not a steel game ball that sticks to the magnet is mixed may be appropriately changed. For example, a steel game ball that sticks to a magnet and a detection sensor that detects a stainless steel game ball are installed in the launch area 7, and a steel game ball that sticks to a magnet based on the detection signal output from the detection sensor. It may be determined whether or not is mixed. In addition, the specific time of the illegally specified time, which is the comparison target of the ejection ball detection time and is the reference value (threshold value) of whether or not the steel game ball sticking to the magnet is mixed, is also included in the first embodiment. It is not limited and may be changed as appropriate.

Further, although the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is equipped with an approach blocking device 76, the approach blocking movable portion 76k is in a standby state in the shape, operating mode, and installation location of the approach blocking movable portion 76k constituting the approach blocking device 76. It may be appropriately changed as long as it can pass the gaming ball without any trouble and prevent the gaming ball moving toward the gaming area 6 in the operating state from entering the gaming area 6. For example, the rectangular flat plate-shaped approach blocking movable portion 76k is arranged so that the surface is flush with the launch region 7 in the standby state and the long side direction is parallel to the moving direction of the game ball, and is in the operating state. Then, the end portion on the launching device 72 side may be used as a rotation axis, and the tip may be configured to rotate so that the tip on the gaming region 6 side rises.

Further, a part of the outer rail 62 (for example, about 1 to 2 cm) that divides the launch area 7 is composed of a movable part made of another part while maintaining the shape of the part, and the movable part operates. In this state, the end portion on the launching device 72 side may be used as a rotation axis, and the tip on the game area 6 side may be configured to rotate so as to tilt toward the inner rail 63 side. Alternatively, a part of the inner rail 63 (for example, about 1 to 2 cm) that divides the launch region 7 is composed of a movable part made of another part while maintaining the shape of the part, and the movable part is in an operating state. Then, the end portion on the launching device 72 side may be used as a rotation axis, and the tip on the game area 6 side may be configured to rotate so as to be tilted toward the outer rail 62 side.

Further, in the first embodiment, the approach blocking movable portion 76k is arranged near the end portion of the launch area 7 on the side of the game area 6, in other words, near the boundary between the game area 6 and the launch area 7 in the launch area 7. , If it is within the range from the foul ball collection port in the launch area 7 to the game area 6 side, it may be changed as appropriate. For example, the approach blocking movable portion 76k may be arranged around the center along the moving direction of the game ball in the portion formed on the game board 1 in the launch area 7. Alternatively, the approach blocking movable portion 76k may be arranged near the boundary between the inner frame 22 and the game board 1, that is, the end portion on the side of the game area 6, which is a portion formed in the inner frame 22 of the launch area 7. ..

Further, in the first embodiment, the approach blocking movable portion 76k switches from the standby state to the operating state when the front door 23 is opened so as not to pass the game ball moving toward the game area 6. This timing may be appropriately changed as long as it is possible to prevent the game ball moving toward the game area 6 from passing through. For example, even if the front door 23 is not opened, the approach blocking movable portion 76k may be switched from the standby state to the operating state when the lock 302 is unlocked. Alternatively, even if the front door 23 is not opened, the approach blocking movable portion 76k may be switched from the standby state to the operating state when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after the lock 302 is unlocked. good.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the lock 302 is unlocked, the launching device 72 is prohibited from firing the game ball, but this timing is toward the game area 6 when the front door 23 is opened. It may be appropriately changed as long as it can prevent the moving game ball from coming out of the pachinko gaming machine PY1. For example, when the front door 23 is opened, the launching device 72 may prohibit the firing of the game ball. Alternatively, the launching of the game ball by the launching device 72 may be prohibited when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the unlocking of the lock 302. Further, in the first embodiment, the frame control microcomputer 181 turns on the launch prohibition flag, and while the launch prohibition flag is ON, the game is prevented from reaching the process (S5409) for executing the launch of the game ball. Although the firing of the ball is prohibited, the method of prohibiting this can be changed as appropriate. For example, the detection signal from the touch switch 72a and the detection signal from the firing volume knob 72b are invalidated or cannot be input. By doing so, the launch of the game ball may be prohibited. Alternatively, the launching handle 72k may be fixed at the initial position, or the launching device 72 may not operate, thereby prohibiting the launching of the game ball.

Further, in the first embodiment, the game board 1 and the game board 1 are based on the manufacturer identification information set in the input / output port 162a for the upper frame lamp, the input / output port 163a for the lower frame lamp, and the input / output port 165a for the effect button. Whether or not it is consistent with the front door 23 is determined, but any one of the input / output port 162a for the upper frame lamp, the input / output port 163a for the lower frame lamp, and the input / output port 165a for the effect button. , Or, based on the manufacturer identification information set in either two, it may be determined whether or not the game board 1 and the front door 23 are aligned. However, when the determination is made based on one manufacturer identification information, there is a possibility that the input / output port itself is out of order. Therefore, it is preferable that there are at least two input / output ports related to the determination. Further, from the viewpoint of improving the accuracy of determining whether the input / output ports are out of order or the game board 1 and the front door 23 are not matched, it is preferable that the number of input / output ports related to the determination is increased.

Further, the front door 23 is equipped with a board for controlling the speaker 52 attached to the front door 23, and the input / output ports of the board are set with address information including manufacturer identification information and device information. , In place of any one or two of the input / output port 162a for the upper frame lamp, the input / output port 163a for the lower frame lamp, and the input / output port 165a for the effect button, or the input / output port 162a for the upper frame lamp, lower. In addition to the frame lamp input / output port 163a and the effect button input / output port 165a, the input / output port related to the speaker 52 is also used to determine whether or not the game board 1 and the front door 23 are aligned. You may do so.

Further, a production device different from the speaker 52, the upper frame lamp 53U, the lower frame lamp 53D, and the first effect button 40k, such as a movable device that can operate like the panel movable device 55, is attached to the front door 23 to mount the effect device. The input / output ports mounted on the control board are set with address information including manufacturer identification information and device information, and are the input / output port 162a for the upper frame lamp, the input / output port 163a for the lower frame lamp, and the effect button. In place of any one or two of the input / output ports 165a, or in addition to the input / output port 162a for the upper frame lamp, the input / output port 163a for the lower frame lamp, and the input / output port 165a for the effect button, the effect. The input / output port related to the device may also be used to determine whether or not the game board 1 and the front door 23 are aligned.

Further, in the first embodiment, the address information set in the input / output ports 162a, 163a, 165a includes the manufacturer identification information for determining whether or not the game board 1 and the front door 23 are matched. However, in place of or in addition to the manufacturer identification information that identifies the manufacturer, identification information that identifies the model (model identification information) or identification information that identifies the series related to the model (model series identification information) is used. It may be included in the address information. In this way, by including the model identification information and the model series identification information in the address information, it is determined whether or not the game board 1 and the front door 23 are matched even for the pachinko gaming machines related to the same manufacturer. can do.

Further, in the first embodiment, the controller 128 is mounted on the staging control board 120 as a separate component from the staging control microcomputer 121, but may be configured to be built in the staging control microcomputer 121. Further, although the controller 128 and various input / output ports 162a, 163a, 164a, and 165a are connected by serial communication, they may be connected by parallel communication. Further, in the first embodiment, the various input / output ports 162a, 163a, 164a, and 165a transmit ACK to the controller 128 when the data is received, but the specification may not be transmitted. In this case, the controller 128 may be configured to detect a transmission error by a predetermined method.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment according to the present invention will be described. In the following, mainly, as the second embodiment, the basic embodiment and the differences from the first embodiment will be described. Further, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those of the basic embodiment and the first embodiment, or similarly corresponding configurations.

FIG. 64 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration mainly related to the game control board 100 and the frame control board 180 according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 64, the pachinko gaming machine PY2 of the second embodiment contains a larger amount of iron than a stainless steel gaming ball, and is an illegal ball detection sensor as a sensor that directly detects a gaming ball that is attracted to a magnet. 313a is installed. As mentioned above, fraud may be performed using a game ball containing more iron than stainless steel, but the fraudulent ball detection sensor 313a does not detect the stainless steel game ball and is more than a stainless steel game ball. It also contains a large amount of iron and is configured to be able to detect a game ball that sticks to a magnet. In the following, a game ball containing more iron than a stainless steel game ball and attracting to a magnet will be referred to as an "illegal ball".

The fraudulent ball detection sensor 313a is a collection passage (not shown) and is provided near the downstream side of the discharge ball detection sensor 310a. When the illegal ball detection sensor 313a detects an illegal ball, the illegal ball detection sensor 313a outputs a signal (illegal ball detection signal) indicating that the illegal ball is detected to the frame control board 180.

Next, the frame control side timer interrupt process (S5005) according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing an example of the frame control side timer interrupt processing. As shown in FIG. 65, in steps S5201 to S5208, the same subsystem processing as in the first embodiment is performed. However, as will be described later, the control content of the fraud detection process in step S5206 is different from that of the first embodiment.

Then, in the second embodiment, in step S5209, the difference ball number management process, which is not performed in the first embodiment, is performed. The difference ball number management process manages the difference (number of difference balls) between the number of game balls that have entered the game area 6 (number of approach balls) and the number of game balls discharged from the game area 6 (number of ejected balls). It is a process to do. The other processing of step S5210 in the second embodiment has the same control content as the other processing of step S5209 in the first embodiment.

Next, the fraud detection process (S5206) according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing an example of fraud detection processing (S5206). As shown in FIG. 66, in the fraud detection process (S5206), the frame control microcomputer 181 first determines whether or not there is a fraudulent ball, in other words, whether or not a fraudulent ball detection signal from the fraudulent ball detection sensor 313a is input. (S5601).

When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that there is no illegal ball (NO in S5601), the fraud detection process (S5206) is completed as it is, and when it is determined that there is an illegal ball (YES in S5601), in step S5602, as described above. Similarly, the fraud notification is performed, and the fraud detection process (S5206) is completed. The content of the fraud notification can be appropriately set within a range in which it is recognizable that fraud has occurred, but in the second embodiment, it is configured in the same manner as in the first embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the discharge ball detection sensor 310a is provided in the collection passage, but since the discharge ball detection sensor 310a can detect not only an illegal ball but also a stainless steel game ball, the first embodiment It was necessary to detect the fraudulent ball by the control related to the fraud detection process (FIG. 58). However, in the second embodiment, since the fraudulent ball detection sensor 313a that detects the fraudulent ball without detecting the stainless steel game ball is provided in the collection passage, it depends on whether or not the fraudulent ball detection sensor 313a has detected it. It is possible to directly determine whether or not an illegal ball exists.

Next, the difference ball number management process (S5209) according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing an example of the difference ball number management process (S5209). The ball holding number storage unit 185 is provided with a difference ball number counter for counting the difference ball number, and the staging control microcomputer 121 manages the difference ball number using the difference ball number counter. Therefore, if fraud is not performed, the counter value of the difference ball number counter indicates the difference ball number at that time. In addition, the difference ball number indicates "+" when the number of approaching balls is larger than the number of ejected balls, and "-" when the number of approaching balls is smaller than the number of ejected balls in the situation where fraud is not performed. show.

As shown in FIG. 65, the effect control microcomputer 121 first determines in step S5901 whether or not there is a launch ball in the difference ball number management process (S5209). As described above, when the launch ball is generated, the launch ball detection sensor 311a outputs the launch ball detection signal to the frame control board 180. Therefore, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines in step S5901 whether or not the launch ball detection signal has been input.

When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that there is no launch ball (NO in S5901), the process proceeds to step S5903 as it is, and when it is determined that there is a launch ball (YES in S5901), the counter value of the difference ball count counter is determined in step S5902. By adding "1", the number of difference balls to be managed is added by "1", and the process proceeds to step S5903. It is determined that there is a launch ball, and the difference ball number is added by "1" because the game ball is launched because the game ball may enter the game area 6.

In step S5903, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not there is a foul ball. As described above, when a foul ball is generated, the foul ball detection sensor 312a outputs a foul ball detection signal to the frame control board 180. Therefore, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines in step S5903 whether or not the foul ball detection signal has been input.

When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that there is no foul ball (NO in S5903), the process proceeds to step S5905 as it is, and when it is determined that there is a foul ball (YES in S5903), the counter value of the difference ball count counter is determined in step S5904. By subtracting "1", the number of difference balls to be managed is subtracted by "1", and the process proceeds to step S5905. It is determined that there was a foul ball and the difference ball number is subtracted by "1" because the game ball is launched and the difference ball number is added by "1", but the foul ball is not entered into the game area 6. This is because it was collected as a sphere, so it is necessary to cancel the addition of "1".

In step S5905, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not there is an ejection ball. As described above, when the discharge ball is generated, the discharge ball detection sensor 310a outputs the discharge ball detection signal to the frame control board 180. Therefore, in step S5905, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines whether or not the ejection ball detection signal has been input.

When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that there is no ejected ball (NO in S5905), the process proceeds to step S5907 as it is, and when it is determined that there is an ejected ball (YES in S5905), the counter value of the difference ball count counter is determined in step S5906. By subtracting "1", the number of difference balls to be managed is subtracted by "1", and the process proceeds to step S5907. The reason why it is determined that there is a ejected ball and the difference number of balls is subtracted by "1" is that the gaming ball that has entered the gaming area 6 is ejected from the gaming area 6.

The effect control microcomputer 121 determines in step S5907 whether or not there is an illegal ball. As described above, when an illegal ball is generated, the illegal ball detection sensor 313a outputs an illegal ball detection signal to the frame control board 180. Therefore, the frame control microcomputer 181 determines in step S5907 whether or not the illegal ball detection signal is input.

When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that there is no illegal ball (NO in S5907), the process proceeds to step S5909 as it is, and when it is determined that there is an illegal ball (YES in S5907), the counter value of the difference ball count counter is determined in step S5908. By adding "1", the number of difference balls to be managed is added by "1", and the process proceeds to step S5909. It is determined that there was an illegal ball and the difference ball number is added by "1". The fact that the illegal ball is detected means that a game ball different from the game ball that is legally circulated by the pachinko gaming machine PY2 is used. This is because it is thrown into the pachinko gaming machine PY2 and counted as a discharge ball, so that amount is canceled.

In step S5909, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the number of difference balls is larger than a predetermined excess threshold value (for example, +30). A predetermined excess threshold value (for example, +30) can remain in the game area 6 when the game ball that has entered the game area 6 is normally discharged from the game area 6 while the game ball continues to be fired normally. It is set to a value that appropriately exceeds the number of game balls, and can be appropriately set within a range that can appropriately indicate this. The fact that the number of difference balls exceeds a predetermined excess threshold means that a large number of game balls are clogged with nails or the like, or the front door 23 is opened and the game balls go out of the pachinko gaming machine PY2. It is assumed that there is a situation in which the person has not returned as much as he / she went out.

When the frame control microcomputer 181 determines that the difference ball number does not exceed a predetermined excess threshold value (NO in S5909), the frame control microcomputer 181 ends the difference ball number management process (S5209) as it is and performs the frame control side timer interrupt process (S5005). Returning, if it is determined that the difference ball number exceeds a predetermined excess threshold value (YES in S5909), in step S5910, the difference ball number abnormality notification that notifies that the difference ball number is abnormal (difference ball number abnormality error) is notified. After that, the difference ball number management process (S5209) is completed, and the process returns to the frame control side timer interrupt process (S5005).

The difference ball number abnormality notification in step S5910 is performed by displaying an image indicating that the difference ball number abnormality has occurred on the display unit 50a. Since the frame control board 180 and the staging control board 120 are not directly connected, the frame control board 180 displays an image (difference ball number abnormality notification image) indicating that a difference ball number abnormality has occurred in the display unit 50a. Set the output buffer of the frame control RAM 184 to the difference ball number abnormality notification request command that requests to display (execute the difference ball number abnormality notification). The difference ball number abnormality notification request command set in the output buffer is transmitted to the game control board 100 by the output process (S5003). When the game control microcomputer 101 receives the difference ball number abnormality notification request command, it transmits a difference ball number abnormality notification designation command specifying that the difference ball number abnormality notification is executed to the effect control board 120. When the effect control microcomputer 121 receives the difference ball number abnormality notification designation command, it transmits a command (difference ball number abnormality notification start command) indicating that the difference ball number abnormality notification is executed to the image control board 140.

When the image control board 140 receives the command to start the difference ball number abnormality notification, the image control board 140 displays the difference ball number abnormality notification image on the display unit 50a for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). The specific display content of the difference ball number abnormality notification image can be appropriately set within a range in which it can be recognized that the difference ball number abnormality has occurred, but in the second embodiment, the difference ball number abnormality is present. It is composed of the explanation "The difference in the number of balls is abnormal. Please cancel."

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine PY2 is a gaming machine that plays a game by flowing a stainless steel gaming ball into the gaming area 6, and detects a steel gaming ball sticking to a magnet, but is made of stainless steel. It is equipped with an illegal ball detection sensor 313a (specific detection sensor) that does not detect game balls and a frame control board 180 (control means), and the illegal ball detection sensor 313a detects the steel game ball that sticks to the magnet. The indicated fraudulent ball detection signal (specific detection signal) is output toward the frame control board 180, and the frame control board 180 can execute fraudulent notification (specific notification) based on the input of the fraudulent ball detection signal. Therefore, basically, in the specification of playing a game by flowing a stainless steel game ball into the game area 6, the game store is notified by simple control that a steel game ball sticking to a magnet is mixed. can do. Further, the pachinko game machine PY2 further includes a steel game ball that sticks to the magnet and a discharge ball detection sensor 310a (non-specific detection sensor) that detects the stainless steel game ball, and the discharge ball detection sensor 310a is attached to the magnet. When a sticking steel game ball and a stainless steel game ball are detected, a discharge ball detection signal (non-specific detection signal) indicating the detection is output to the frame control board 180, and the frame control board 180 detects the discharge ball. Based on the input of the signal, it is possible to execute control regarding the number of different balls (predetermined items regarding the game ball). Therefore, while monitoring the presence of steel game balls sticking to the magnets, it is possible to execute predetermined items regarding the game balls, specifically, control regarding the number of difference balls, and improve the game interest.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine PY2, the illegal ball detection sensor 313a and the ejection ball detection sensor 310a are mounted in close proximity to a specific place where the game ball can pass, so that they are made of steel that accurately sticks to the magnet. While monitoring that the game balls are mixed in, it is possible to execute predetermined items regarding the game balls, specifically, control regarding the number of difference balls. Moreover, since the specific location is located in the recovery passage formed outside the game area 6 where the game ball that has entered the game area 6 can be collected and passed through, the steel game ball that sticks to the magnet more accurately. It is also possible to execute predetermined items regarding the game ball, specifically, control regarding the number of difference balls, while monitoring that the magnets are mixed. Furthermore, since the fraudulent notification is a notification indicating that a steel game ball sticking to a magnet has been detected, a clerk at a game store can easily understand that a steel game ball sticking to a magnet has been detected. Can be done.

(Example of modification of the second embodiment)
Next, a modified example of the pachinko gaming machine PY2 according to the second embodiment will be described. It is also possible to appropriately combine the modification examples described below.

In the second embodiment, whether or not a steel game ball sticking to the magnet is mixed based on the illegal ball detection signal from the illegal ball detection sensor 313a installed in the recovery passage formed outside the game area 6. However, the installation position of the detection sensor for determining whether or not a steel game ball sticking to the magnet is mixed may be appropriately changed. For example, an illegal ball detection sensor 313a that detects a steel game ball that sticks to a magnet but does not detect a stainless steel game ball may be installed in the launch region 7.

Further, in the second embodiment, the ejection ball detection sensor 310a is installed in the collection passage, but the pachinko gaming machine PY2 may be configured not to be equipped with the ejection ball detection sensor 310a. Further, in the second embodiment, the control / management regarding the number of difference balls is performed based on the discharge ball detection sensor 310a, but instead of the number of difference balls or in addition to the number of difference balls, other than the number of difference balls. It is also possible to control and manage the predetermined items related to the game ball. Here, the detection of the illegal ball by the ejection ball detection sensor 310a causes a problem or a problem in the control and management of the predetermined items related to the game ball, but the problem or the problem is caused based on the illegal ball detection signal. If the above can be corrected, the frame control microcomputer 181 may appropriately perform processing for correcting the defect or trouble based on the illegal ball detection signal.

Further, in the second embodiment, the ejection ball detection sensor 310a and the fraudulent ball detection sensor 313a are attached in a close state, but are not close to each other and are separated to some extent (for example, about 5 to 10 cm apart). It may be attached in the state).

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine PY2, the number of difference balls is counted. For example, when the number of difference balls indicates "+" in a situation where the game balls are not fired and there are no game balls in the game area 6. There is a possibility that illegal balls have flowed into the pachinko gaming machine PY2 by that number. Therefore, the unit display device 300 or the display unit 50a may be configured to be able to display the number of difference balls. With this configuration, it is possible to confirm that the fraudulent ball has flowed into the pachinko gaming machine PY2. Furthermore, by determining the number of difference balls displayed on the unit display device 300 or the display unit 50a in combination with the presence or absence of fraudulent notification, fraudulent inflow of fraudulent balls into the pachinko gaming machine PY2 is performed more accurately. It is possible to judge whether or not it has been damaged.

(Examples of changes common to the first embodiment and the second embodiment)
Next, a modification common to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first embodiment and the pachinko gaming machine PY2 according to the second embodiment will be described. It is also possible to appropriately combine the modification examples described below. Further, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 and the pachinko gaming machine PY2 are referred to as "pachinko gaming machine PY1 and the like".

The pachinko gaming machine PY1 and the like are composed of an enclosed gaming machine, but may be configured by a gaming machine that allows the player to touch the gaming ball, such as the pachinko gaming machine PY according to the basic embodiment. .. In particular, even when the frame control microcomputer 181 is configured by a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine PY in which a player can touch a gaming ball, the first embodiment and the second embodiment As in the case, it is possible to execute the frame control main process, the power-on time process (S5001), and the frame control side timer interrupt process (S5005).

Further, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 and the like count (control and manage) the number of balls held based on the launch ball and the foul ball, but count (control and manage) the number of balls held based on the discharged ball. Is also good. In this case, when the frame control microcomputer 181 detects the ejected ball, the number of possessed balls is subtracted by "1".

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 or the like, by operating the ball holding number display button 301k, the holding ball number display at that time is displayed on the holding ball number display 301b, but the holding ball number display button 301k is mounted. However, basically, the number of balls held at that time may be displayed on the ball holding number display 301b. Further, instead of or in addition to that, the number of balls held may be displayed in a predetermined area of the display unit 50a. The condition for displaying the number of balls held in this case can be appropriately set. For example, even if the number of balls held can be displayed during normal fluctuations or at all times, the first effect button 40k is operated. The number of balls may be displayed accordingly. Further, the unit display device 300 may be configured to be able to display the number of balls held. The condition for displaying the number of balls held in this case can be appropriately set. For example, when an IC card is inserted in the card unit CU, the number of balls held may be displayed on the unit display device 300. good.

Also, in pachinko game machines such as PY1, basically stainless steel game balls that do not stick to magnets are used, but it does not mean that they do not completely stick to magnets, but depending on the type of magnet, they are made of stainless steel that sticks to magnets. The game ball of may be used.

8. Other modified examples Next, other modified examples of the pachinko gaming machine PY according to the basic embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first embodiment, and the pachinko gaming machine PY2 according to the second embodiment are as follows. explain. Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine PY, the pachinko gaming machine PY1, and the pachinko gaming machine PY2 will be referred to as "pachinko gaming machine PY and the like".

In pachinko gaming machines such as PY, variable display of staging symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed using the display unit 50a in order to notify the special figure lottery result, but instead of the image display device, a so-called "rotating drum type gaming machine" (Slot machine) ”may be arranged, and the special figure lottery result may be notified by variably displaying the drum on which the symbol is displayed.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine PY or the like, the big winning opening 14 can be opened in the big hit game, but a winning area that can be opened in the big hit game may be provided in addition to the big winning opening 14.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine PY or the like, when it is determined to be a specific jackpot symbol type, the game always proceeds in a high probability state after the jackpot game. That is, the setting of the high probability state is associated with the jackpot symbol type. However, the setting condition of the high probability state may be changed. For example, apart from the big winning device 14D, a second big winning device that can be opened and closed and a game ball can enter at the time of opening is provided at a position where the game ball in the game area 6 can reach, and the big hit game is in progress. When the game ball that has entered the second big prize device after the second big prize device is opened in a predetermined round game passes through a specific area provided on the downstream side thereof, a high probability state is reached with the end of the big hit game. May be set.

In this case, for example, a specific jackpot symbol (a jackpot symbol that makes it easy to set a high probability state) that the second prize-winning device opens for a time (for example, 29.5 seconds) that makes it easy to enter the ball, and the second prize-winning device wins the ball. A non-specific jackpot symbol (a jackpot symbol that makes it difficult to set a high probability state) that opens for a difficult time (for example, 0.5 seconds) can be provided. Further, there are a specific area and a non-specific area as areas through which the game ball won in the second big prize device can pass, and a distribution device for distributing the game ball to the specific area and the non-specific area is provided. Then, although the opening time of the second prize-winning device is the same, the jackpot symbol and the high-probability state that make it easy to set the high-probability state can be obtained by combining the opening mode of the second prize-winning device and the operating mode of the sorting device. It is also possible to provide a jackpot symbol that is difficult to set.

Further, in a pachinko gaming machine PY or the like, the game control board 100 performs basic control related to the progress of the game, and the effect control board performs basic control related to the progress of the effect according to the progress of the game (control of the game). Although the game control and the staging control are performed on different boards as in the case of 120, it may be configured to perform the game control and the effect control on one board. In this case, the image control board 140 may be included in the one board, or may be provided separately from the one board.

Further, the gaming machine of the present invention can be applied to other ball gaming machines such as an arrange ball machine and a sparrow ball gaming machine, a rotating body type gaming machine (so-called "slot machine"), and the like.

8. Inventions disclosed in the above-described embodiments The following inventions A to K are disclosed up to the preceding paragraph in this [mode for carrying out the invention]. In the description of the inventions A to K, the names and expressions of the corresponding configurations in the embodiment of the above-mentioned invention and the reference numerals used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, the elements such as the means constituting each invention are not limited to this appendix. Invention A is a general term for the following inventions A1 to A6, invention B is a general term for the following inventions B1 to B5, invention C is a general term for the following inventions C1 to C4, and invention D is a general term for the following inventions C1 to C4. , The following inventions D1 to D4, invention E is a general term for the following inventions E1 to E3, invention F is a general term for the following inventions F1 to F5, and invention G is the following invention G1. ~ G3, invention H is a general term for the following inventions H1 to H4, invention I is a general term for the following inventions I1 to I3, and invention J is a general term for the following inventions J1 to J2. Yes, invention K is a general term for the following inventions K1 to K5.

According to the invention A, the control means for launching the gaming ball is space-saving and the cost is suppressed for the problem 1 described below for the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-181256. It has the effect of being able to do it. In the gaming machine described in JP-A-2019-181256, the gaming ball is launched toward the gaming area at a predetermined cycle by a launching control board dedicated to the launching device for launching the gaming ball. However, when a dedicated launch control board for launching a game ball is mounted, it is necessary to secure a place for installing the board. In addition, the number of required parts such as a harness for connection increases, which increases the cost. Therefore, the first issue is to provide a gaming machine capable of saving space and reducing costs for a control means for launching a gaming ball.

Further, according to the invention B and the invention C, when the stored data becomes abnormal with respect to the problem 2 described below for the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-181256, the data is concerned. Has the effect of being able to restore. In the gaming machine described in JP-A-2019-181256, a microcomputer including a processing measure such as a CPU (Central Processing Unit) that executes a predetermined control and a storage device such as a RAM (Random Access Memory) that stores data is used. It is installed. However, the microcomputer can be initialized or damaged for some reason. As a result, the data stored in the microcomputer may become abnormal. Therefore, the second task is to provide a gaming machine that can restore the stored data when the stored data becomes abnormal.

Further, according to the invention D and the invention E, the number of gaming balls (number of balls held) that can be used in the game is determined for the problem 3 described below for the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-192613. When an abnormality occurs in the control device that manages electronically, it has the effect of being able to recognize the number of balls held. In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-192613, the number of balls held may be managed electronically. However, if an abnormality occurs in the control device that electronically manages the number of balls held and the actual number of balls held becomes unknown, the player suffers damage. Therefore, the third task is to provide a gaming machine capable of recognizing the number of gaming balls when an abnormality occurs in the control device that electronically manages the number of possessed balls.

Further, according to the invention F and the invention G, the gaming ball of the regular material used for the pachinko gaming machine is detected for the problem 4 described below for the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-209224. At the same time, it has the effect of being able to detect a game ball made of steel. In the gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-209224, a steel gaming ball was used. However, there has been a problem that various frauds using the material of the game ball, such as guiding a steel game ball with a magnet to win a prize at the starting port, are performed. Therefore, it is conceivable to change the material of the game ball. However, even if the material of the gaming ball is changed, it is assumed that a fraudulent act of mixing the steel gaming ball into the pachinko gaming machine may be performed. Further, when playing a game with a pachinko gaming machine, it is also necessary to detect a gaming ball made of a material other than the regular steel used for the pachinko gaming machine. Therefore, the fourth task is to provide a gaming machine capable of detecting a gaming ball made of a regular material used for a pachinko gaming machine and also detecting a steel gaming ball.

Further, according to the invention H, the invention I, and the invention G, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-192613 was fired when the front door was opened for the problem 5 described below. It has the effect of preventing the game ball from jumping out. In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-192613, the gaming area in which the launched gaming ball can enter is arranged inside the pachinko gaming machine. A front door that can be opened and closed is attached to the front side of the gaming area, and the game is played with the pachinko gaming machine closed by the front door. When the pachinko gaming machine is closed by the front door, the game area and the outside are blocked by the front door, so that the launched game ball does not jump out. However, when the front door is opened for some reason, the fired game ball may jump out and be lost. Therefore, the fifth task is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing the launched gaming ball from jumping out when the front door is opened.

Further, according to the invention K, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent an error in attaching the front door to a certain gaming board with respect to the problem 6 described below for the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-192613. The gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-192613 includes a gaming board and a front door that is openable and closable with respect to the gaming board. In recent years, in general, the gaming board and the front door constituting one pachinko gaming machine are designed and manufactured by the same manufacturer, but the gaming board and the front door may be designed and manufactured by different manufacturers. Conceivable. As a result, for example, in a game store, a front door of a different model may be attached to a certain game board. Further, even if the game board and the front door are designed and manufactured by the same manufacturer, for example, in a factory or the like, there is a possibility that a front door of a different model may be attached to a certain game board. Therefore, the subject 6 is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing an error in attaching the front door to a certain gaming board.

8-1-1. Invention A1
The gaming machine according to the invention A1 is
A launcher (launcher 72) that launches a game ball,
A control means (frame control board 180) for controlling the launch of the game ball by the launching device and controlling predetermined items (number of balls held, etc.) other than the launch of the game ball is provided.
The control means can execute unit control related to one launch of a game ball at a predetermined cycle (600 msec).
The unit control is a gaming machine characterized in that it is composed of launching a gaming ball and a launch standby that does not launch the gaming ball until the next launch of the gaming ball after the launch.

8-1-2. Invention A2
The gaming machine according to the invention A2 is
A gaming machine according to the invention A1.
The gaming machine according to claim 1.
A gaming machine characterized in that, in response to the end of the unit control, a firing cycle change control in which a gaming ball different from the launch standby is not launched may be executed.

8-1-3. Invention A3
The gaming machine according to the invention A3 is
A gaming machine according to the invention A2.
A gaming machine characterized in that the time related to the firing cycle change control is shorter than the time related to the predetermined cycle.

8-1--4. Invention A4
The gaming machine according to the invention A4 is
A gaming machine according to the invention A2 or the invention A3.
The control means can execute control at a predetermined minimum time interval (4 ms).
A gaming machine characterized in that the time related to the firing cycle change control and the time related to the predetermined cycle can be divided by the minimum time interval.

8-1-5. Invention A5
The gaming machine according to the invention A5 is
A gaming machine according to any one of Invention A2 to Invention A4.
The control means can periodically execute specific control (unit launch control) related to launching a plurality of game balls.
A gaming machine characterized in that each specific control includes at least two or more first number of times (4 times) of the unit control and a second number of times (1 time) of firing cycle change control.

8-1-6. Invention A6
The gaming machine according to the invention A6 is
A gaming machine according to the invention A5.
Further provided with an operating means (launch handle 72k) capable of accepting a specific operation (rotational operation) for launching the game ball.
The launching device launches a game ball in response to the specific operation received by the operating means.
The control means is a gaming machine characterized in that the specific control can be periodically executed on condition that the specific operation is accepted.

8-2-1. Invention B1
The gaming machine according to the invention B1 is
In a gaming machine provided with a control means (frame control board 180) capable of executing predetermined control and a storage means (frame control RAM 184) capable of storing predetermined data.
The storage means includes a first storage unit (ball holding number storage unit 185) and a second storage unit (frame control side ball holding number BU unit 185).
The first storage unit stores data representing a specific item (number of balls held) as main data (master data of the number of balls held).
The second storage unit stores a plurality of data representing the specific item as sub data (frame control side ball number BU data), and stores the data.
When the control means determines that the storage means is abnormal, whether or not the predetermined conditions are satisfied for the plurality of sub-data (the number of balls held by the frame control side BU data is all one). If it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the main data is newly generated based on the plurality of sub data and stored in the first storage unit. A gaming machine characterized by having.

8-2-2. Invention B2
The gaming machine according to the invention B2 is
A gaming machine according to invention B1.
The control means is characterized in that it may determine whether or not the storage means is abnormal when electric power is supplied to the gaming machine.

8-2-3. Invention B3
The gaming machine according to the invention B3 is
A gaming machine according to invention B1 or invention B2.
The specific item is a gaming machine characterized by the number of gaming media (number of balls held) that can be used for the game.

8-2-4. Invention B4
The gaming machine according to the invention B4 is
A gaming machine according to any one of Invention B1 to Invention B3.
The second storage unit stores three or more of the sub-data,
The predetermined condition is that all the contents represented by the sub data match.
The control means is a gaming machine characterized in that data representing contents that match all of the sub data are stored in the first storage unit as the main data.

8-2-5. Invention B5
The gaming machine according to the invention B5 is
A gaming machine according to any one of Invention B1 to Invention B3.
The second storage unit stores three or more of the sub-data,
The predetermined condition is that the content represented by the sub-data matches with a predetermined number of half or more of the number of the sub-data.
The control means is a gaming machine characterized in that data representing a predetermined number of matching contents, which is more than half of the number of sub-data, is stored in the first storage unit as the main data.

8-3-1. Invention C1
The gaming machine according to the invention C1 is
Specific control means (frame control means 180) that controls predetermined items (number of balls held) that may change according to the progress of the game, and
A non-specific control means (game control means 100) different from the specific control means is provided.
The specific control means has a specific storage unit (frame control RAM 184) that stores first data (master data for the number of balls held) representing the predetermined items.
The non-specific control means has a non-specific storage unit (game RAM 104) that stores second data (game control side ball number BU data) representing the predetermined item.
When the predetermined condition is satisfied (the number of possessed balls is updated), the specific control means transfers the third data (command for updating the number of possessed balls) including the predetermined item represented by the first data to the non-specific control means. Send and
When the non-specific control means receives the third data, the non-specific control means updates the second data stored in the non-specific storage unit based on the third data.

8-3-2. Invention C2
The gaming machine according to the invention C2 is
A gaming machine according to invention C1.
When the specific storage unit is determined to be abnormal, the specific control means may newly generate the first data based on the second data and store the first data in the specific storage unit. A featured gaming machine.

8-3-3. Invention C3
The gaming machine according to the invention C3 is
A gaming machine according to invention C2.
The specific control means is a gaming machine, characterized in that it may determine whether or not the specific storage unit is abnormal when electric power is supplied to the gaming machine.

8-3-4. Invention C4
The gaming machine according to the invention C4 is
A gaming machine according to any one of the inventions C1 to C3.
The predetermined item is a gaming machine characterized by the number of gaming media (number of balls held) that can be used for the game.

8-3-5. Invention C5
A gaming machine according to any one of the inventions C1 to C4.
The specific control means can update the first data stored in the specific storage unit according to the progress of the game.
The gaming machine, characterized in that the predetermined condition includes the specific control means updating the first data.

8-4-1. Invention D1
The gaming machine according to the invention D1 is
Specific control means (frame control board 180) that controls the number of game media (number of balls held) that the player can use in the game, and
Equipped with a display means (image display device 50)
The specific control means has a specific storage unit (frame control RAM 184) that stores data indicating the number of game media that the player can use in the game, and determines whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the specific storage unit. May be
The display means is a gaming machine capable of displaying the number of game media that can be used by a player in a game when the specific control means determines that an abnormality has occurred in the specific storage unit.

8-4-2. Invention D2
The gaming machine according to the invention D2 is
A gaming machine according to invention D1.
Further equipped with an operable operation means (first effect button 40k),
The display means is a gaming machine capable of displaying the number of game media that can be used by a player in a game on condition that the operation means has been subjected to a predetermined operation (long press operation).

8-4-3. Invention D3
The gaming machine according to the invention D3 is
A gaming machine according to invention D2.
The predetermined operation is a gaming machine characterized in that it can be executed during a predetermined period in which the game is not executed.

8-4-4. Invention D4
The gaming machine according to the invention D4 is
A gaming machine according to any one of the inventions D1 to D3.
A non-specific control means (game control means 100) different from the specific control means is provided.
The non-specific control means can execute control related to the game, and has a non-specific storage unit (game RAM 104) that stores data indicating the number of game media that the player can use in the game.
The display means can execute a display effect according to the game by the non-specific control means.
The specific control means is specified including the number of game media that can be used by the player in the game represented by the data stored in the specific storage unit when a predetermined condition is satisfied (the number of balls held is updated). Data (command to specify the number of balls held) is transmitted to the non-specific control means,
Upon receiving the specific data, the non-specific control means updates the data on the number of game media that can be used by the player in the game, which is stored in the non-specific storage unit based on the specific data.
The display means can display the number of game media that the player can use in the game based on the data of the number of game media that the player can use in the game, which is stored in the non-specific storage unit. A gaming machine characterized by that.

8-5-1. Invention E1
The gaming machine according to the invention E1 is
Specific control means (frame control board 180) that controls the number of game media (number of balls held) that the player can use in the game, and
Equipped with a display means (ball number display device 300)
The specific control means has a specific storage unit (frame control RAM 184) that stores first number data (master data for the number of balls held) representing the number of game media that the player can use in the game.
The display means is a non-specific storage unit (display device side number of balls BU unit 301d) that stores second number data (display device side number of balls BU data) representing the number of game media that the player can use in the game. ), And the player can display the number of game media that can be used in the game, as indicated by the second number data stored in the non-specific storage unit.

8-5-2. Invention E2
The gaming machine according to the invention E2 is
A gaming machine according to the invention E1.
The specific control means has specific data (number of balls held) including the number of game media that the player can use in the game represented by the first number data when a predetermined condition is satisfied (the number of balls held is updated). The update designation signal) is transmitted to the display means,
When the display means receives the specific data, the display means updates the second number of data stored in the non-specific storage unit based on the specific data.

8-5-3. Invention E3
The gaming machine according to the invention E3 is
A gaming machine according to the invention E2.
The specific control means can update the first number data stored in the specific storage unit according to the progress of the game.
The gaming machine, characterized in that the predetermined condition includes the specific control means updating the first number data.

8-6-1. Invention F1
The gaming machine according to the invention F1 is
A gaming machine that plays a game by flowing a stainless steel gaming ball into the gaming area (gaming area 6).
A specific detection sensor (illegal ball detection sensor 313a) that detects a steel game ball that sticks to a magnet but does not detect a stainless steel game ball.
Equipped with a control means (frame control board 180)
When the specific detection sensor detects a steel game ball that sticks to a magnet, it outputs a specific detection signal (illegal ball detection signal) indicating the detection to the control means.
The control means is a gaming machine characterized in that it can execute specific notification (illegal notification) based on the input of the specific signal.

8-6-2. Invention F2
The gaming machine according to the invention F2 is
A gaming machine according to the invention F1.
It is further equipped with a steel game ball that sticks to a magnet and a non-specific detection sensor (discharge ball detection sensor 310a) that detects a stainless steel game ball.
When the non-specific detection sensor detects a steel game ball that sticks to a magnet and a stainless steel game ball, the non-specific detection sensor outputs a non-specific detection signal (emission ball detection signal) indicating the detection to the control means.
The control means is a gaming machine capable of executing control regarding a predetermined item (number of difference balls) relating to a gaming ball based on the input of the non-specific signal.

8-6-3. Invention F3
The gaming machine according to the invention F3 is
A gaming machine according to the invention F2.
The specific detection sensor and the non-specific detection sensor are game machines characterized in that they are mounted in close proximity to a specific place through which a game ball can pass.

8-6-4. Invention F4
The gaming machine according to the invention F4 is
A gaming machine according to the invention F3.
The specific location is a gaming machine characterized in that it is located in a passage (collection passage) formed outside the gaming area where the gaming ball that has entered the gaming area can be collected and passed.

8-6-5. Invention F5
The gaming machine according to the invention F5 is
A gaming machine according to any one of the inventions F1 to F4.
The specific notification is a notification indicating that a steel game ball sticking to a magnet has been detected.

8-7-1. Invention G1
The gaming machine according to the invention G1 is
A gaming machine that plays a game by flowing a stainless steel gaming ball into the gaming area (gaming area 6).
A steel game ball that sticks to a magnet, and a detection sensor (discharge ball detection sensor 310a) that detects a stainless steel game ball,
Equipped with a control means (frame control board 180)
When the detection sensor detects a steel game ball that sticks to a magnet and a stainless steel game ball, the detection sensor outputs a detection signal (emission ball detection signal) indicating the detection to the control means.
The control means is a gaming machine characterized in that when the detection signal is input, the time during which the detection signal is input is measured.

8-7-2. Invention G2
The gaming machine according to the invention G2 is
A gaming machine according to the invention G1.
When the time during which the detection signal is input is longer than a predetermined value (illegal designated time), the control means performs specific notification (illegal notification) indicating that a steel game ball sticking to a magnet has been detected. A game machine characterized by that.

8-7-3. Invention G3
The gaming machine according to the invention G3 is
A gaming machine according to the invention G1 or the invention G2.
The detection sensor is a gaming machine characterized in that it is installed in a passage (collection passage) formed outside the gaming area where a gaming ball that has entered the gaming area can be collected and passed.

8-8-1. Invention H1
The gaming machine according to the invention H1 is
It is a gaming machine in which a gaming area (gaming area 6) through which the launched gaming ball can flow down and a launching area (launching area 7) through which the launched gaming ball can pass toward the gaming area are formed. hand,
The launch area is provided with a movable portion (entry blocking movable portion 76k) that can be switched between a standby state and an operating state.
The movable portion is a gaming machine characterized in that, in the standby state, a gaming ball moving toward the gaming area is passed, and in an operating state, the gaming ball moving toward the gaming area is not passed.

8-8-2. Invention H2
The gaming machine according to the invention H2 is
A gaming machine according to the invention H1.
Further equipped with a launching means (launching device 7) for launching a game ball,
A gaming machine characterized in that a collection port for collecting a game ball moving from the gaming area side toward the launching means as a foul ball is formed between the launching means and the movable portion.

8-8-3. Invention H3
The gaming machine according to the invention H3 is
A gaming machine according to the invention H1 or the invention H2.
A frame-shaped inner frame (inner frame 22) and a game board 1 in which the game area is formed and fitted to an opening (opening 1A) formed in the inner frame are provided.
The launching means is installed in the inner frame and
The launch region is formed over the inner frame and the game board.
The movable portion is a portion formed in the inner frame of the firing region, and is characterized in that the movable portion is arranged near the boundary between the inner frame and the gaming board.

8-8-4. Invention H4
The gaming machine according to the invention H4 is
A gaming machine according to any one of Invention H1 to Invention H3.
A front door (front door 23) that is openably and closably supported by the inner frame on the front side of the game area and the launch area is further provided.
The movable portion is a gaming machine characterized in that the movable portion may switch from the standby state to the operating state in response to the opening of the front door.

8-9-1. Invention I1
The gaming machine according to the invention I1 is
A front door (front door 23) that can be opened and closed on the front side of the game area (game area 6) where the fired game ball can flow down, and a detection means (door) that detects that the front door has been opened. It is a gaming machine equipped with an open detection sensor 23a).
When the opening of the front door is not detected by the detection means, the game ball can enter the game area, and the game ball can be opened in response to the detection of the opening of the front door by the detection means. A gaming machine characterized in that it may prevent entry into the gaming area.

8-9-2. Invention I2
The gaming machine according to the invention I2 is
A gaming machine according to the invention I1.
A launch area (launch area 7) through which the game ball can pass toward the game area is formed on the downstream side of the game area with respect to the launch of the game ball.
When the opening of the front door is not detected by the detection means, the game ball moving toward the game area in the launch area can enter the game area, and the detection means enables the front door to enter the game area. A gaming machine characterized in that, in response to the detection of opening of a door, a gaming ball moving toward the gaming area in the launching region may be prevented from entering the gaming area.

8-9-3. Invention I3
The gaming machine according to the invention I3 is
A gaming machine according to the invention I2.
In the launch area, a movable portion (entry blocking movable portion) that can be switched between a standby state in which a game ball moving toward the game area is passed and an operating state in which the game ball moving toward the game area is not passed. 76k) is provided,
The movable portion is normally held in the standby state, and may switch from the standby state to the operating state in response to the detection of the opening of the front door by the detection means. ..

8-10-1. Invention J1
The gaming machine according to the invention J1 is
A gaming machine equipped with a front door (front door 23) that can be opened and closed on the front side of the gaming area (game area 6) where the launched game ball can flow down.
The front door is provided with a lock (lock 302) capable of holding the closure of the front door and releasing the closure.
A detection means (unlocking detection sensor 302a) for detecting the release of the closure by the lock is provided.
When the release of the closure is not detected by the detection means, the game ball may be launched, and the launch of the game ball may be prohibited depending on the detection of the release of the closure by the detection means. A gaming machine characterized by that.

8-10-2. Invention J2
The gaming machine according to the invention J2 is
A gaming machine according to invention J1.
Further equipped with a launching means (launching device 72) for launching a game ball,
When the release of the closure is not detected by the detection means, the launching means can launch the game ball, and the firing is made in response to the detection of the release of the closure by the detection means. The means is a gaming machine characterized in that the gaming ball cannot be launched.

8-11-1. Invention K1
The gaming machine according to the invention K1
A board (driver board 162 for upper frame lamp) on which an input / output port having a plurality of terminals (input / output port 162a for upper frame lamp, input / output port 163a for lower frame lamp, input / output port 165a for effect button) is mounted. , A game machine equipped with a driver board 163 for a lower frame lamp and a relay board 165) for an effect button.
The address related to the input / output port is set by some of the plurality of terminals among the plurality of terminals.
A gaming machine characterized in that the address includes specific unique information (manufacturer identification information) representing a predetermined attribute (manufacturer).

8-11-2. Invention K2
The gaming machine according to the invention K2 is
A gaming machine according to the invention K1.
The predetermined attribute is a gaming machine characterized by being a company that manufactures the gaming machine.

8-11-3. Invention K3
The gaming machine according to the invention K3 is
A gaming machine according to the invention K2.
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined attribute is a model related to the gaming machine.

8-11-4. Invention K4
The gaming machine according to the invention K4 is
A gaming machine according to any one of Invention K1 to Invention K3.
A game board (game board 1), a front door (front door 23) that is openable and closable to the game board, and a control means (staging control board 120) are further provided.
The board is installed on the front door and
The control means is installed on the game board and
Basic unique information representing the predetermined attribute is stored in the control means.
When the predetermined attribute represented by the basic unique information and the predetermined attribute represented by the specific unique information are different from each other, the control means suggests that the gaming board and the front door are not matched. A gaming machine characterized in that specific notification (frame nonconformity error notification) can be executed.

8-11-5. Invention K5
The gaming machine according to the invention K5 is
A gaming machine according to any one of the inventions K1 to K4.
A gaming machine characterized in that the address includes the specific unique information and individual information (device identification information) associated with each board.

PY, PY1, PY2 ... Pachinko game machine 1 ... Game board 6 ... Game area 7 ... Launch area 11 ... First start port 11a ... First start port sensor 12 ... Second start port 12a ... Second start port sensor 14 ... Large Winning opening 14a ... Large winning opening sensor 22 ... Inner frame 23 ... Front door 23a ... Door open detection sensor 40 ... First effect button device 40k ... First effect button 40 m ... Effect button motor 50 ... Image display device 50a ... Display unit 52 ... Speaker 53 ... Frame lamp 53U ... Upper frame lamp 53D ... Upper frame lamp 72 ... Launch device 72a ... Touch switch 72b ... Launch volume knob 72k ... Launch handle 72m ... Launch motor 76 ... Entry blocking device 76k ... Entry blocking movable part 100 ... Game control board 101 ... Game control microcomputer 104 ... Game RAM
106 ... Number of balls held on the game control side BU unit 120 ... Production control board 121 ... Production control microcomputer 128 ... Controller 129 ... RTC
140 ... Image control board 180 ... Frame control board 181 ... Frame control microcomputer 182 ... Frame control CPU
183 ... ROM for frame control
184 ... RAM for frame control
185 ... Number of balls held storage unit 186 ... Number of balls held on the frame control side BU part 186a ... First number of balls held BU part 186b ... Second number of balls held BU part 186c ... Number of balls held on the third side BU part 162 ... Upper frame lamp Driver board 162a ... Upper frame lamp input / output port 163 ... Lower frame lamp driver board 163a ... Lower frame lamp input / output port 165 ... Direction button relay board 165a ... Direction button input / output port 190 ... Power supply board 300 ... Unit display device 301 ... Number of balls held display device 301a ... Display button detection sensor 301b ... Number of balls held display 301d ... Display control side Number of balls held BU unit 301k ... Number of balls held display button 302 ... Lock 302a ... Unlocking detection sensor 310a ... Discharge ball detection sensor 311a ... Launch ball detection sensor 312a ... Foul ball detection sensor 313a ... Unauthorized ball detection sensor CU ... Card unit

Claims (5)

A gaming machine equipped with a board equipped with input / output ports having multiple terminals.
The address related to the input / output port is set by some of the plurality of terminals among the plurality of terminals.
A gaming machine characterized in that the address contains specific unique information representing a predetermined attribute. The gaming machine according to claim 1.
The predetermined attribute is a gaming machine characterized by being a company that manufactures the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to claim 1.
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined attribute is a model related to the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3.
Further provided with a game board, a front door that is openable and closable to the game board, and control means.
The board is installed on the front door and
The control means is installed on the game board and
Basic unique information representing the predetermined attribute is stored in the control means.
When the predetermined attribute represented by the basic unique information and the predetermined attribute represented by the specific unique information are different from each other, the control means suggests that the gaming board and the front door are not matched. A gaming machine characterized in that specific notification can be executed. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4.
Multiple boards are mounted,
A gaming machine characterized in that the address includes the specific unique information and individual information associated with each board.

Images